3. 《大般涅槃经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Mahāparinibbānasuttavaṇṇanā
131 “大般涅槃”:因为它是应受恭敬的,也因为舍弃了佛陀的成就而转起,并且它是伟大的、是般涅槃,所以称为“大般涅槃”;因为断尽了随眠烦恼,依于伟大的烦恼灭尽而生起的般涅槃,所以也称为“大般涅槃”;由极长的时间或极广的功德聚所成就的般涅槃,也称为“大般涅槃”;为了成就伟大性、为了舍利众多的般涅槃,也称为“大般涅槃”;从广大世间出离的般涅槃,也称为“大般涅槃”;由于佛陀的戒等功德是一切世间所不共的,所以伟大佛陀、世尊的般涅槃,也称为“大般涅槃”;在伟大的教法已经安立时入般涅槃,也称为“大般涅槃”。因此,佛陀世尊的般涅槃被称为“大般涅槃”,与此相关的经就是《大般涅槃经》。
“灵鹫山”:因为秃鹫栖息于此,所以称为“灵鹫”;它有峰顶,所以叫“灵鹫峰”;或者说,形状像秃鹫,所以称“灵鹫”,此山有峰顶,故称“灵鹫峰山”。经文中所说的“灵鹫”等即指此。
“Abhiyātukāmo”:这里的“abhi”前缀是“征服”的意思,如同在“abhivijānātu”等词中一样,所以显示巴利原文
131. Pūjanīyabhāvato , buddhasampadañca pahāya pavattatā mahantañca taṃ parinibbānañcāti mahāparinibbānaṃ; savāsanappahānato mahantaṃ kilesakkhayaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahatā kālena mahatā vā guṇarāsinā sādhitaṃ parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahantabhāvāya, dhātūnaṃ bahubhāvāya parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahato lokato nissaṭaṃ parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; sabbalokāsādhāraṇattā buddhānaṃ sīlādiguṇehi mahato buddhassa bhagavato parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahati sāsane patiṭṭhite parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānanti buddhassa bhagavato parinibbānaṃ vuccati, tappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suttaṃ mahāparinibbānasuttaṃ. Gijjhā ettha vasantīti gijjhaṃ, gijjhaṃ kūṭaṃ etassāti gijjhakūṭo, gijjhaṃ viya vā gijjhaṃ, kūṭaṃ, taṃ etassāti gijjhakūṭo, pabbato, tasmiṃ gijjhakūṭe. Tenāha ‘‘gijjhā’’tiādi. Abhiyātukāmoti ettha abhi-saddo abhibhavanattho, ‘‘abhivijānātū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.244; 3.85; ma. ni. 3.256) viyāti āha ‘‘abhibhavanatthāya yātukāmo’’ti. Vajjirājānoti ‘‘vajjetabbā ime’’tiādito pavattaṃ vacanaṃ upādāya ‘‘vajjī’’ti laddhanāmā rājāno, vajjīraṭṭhassa vā rājāno vajjirājāno. Vajjiraṭṭhassa pana vajjisamaññā tannivāsirājakumāravasena veditabbā. Rājiddhiyāti rājabhāvānugatena sabhāvena. So pana sabhāvo nesaṃ gaṇarājūnaṃ mitho sāmaggiyā loke pākaṭo, ciraṭṭhāyī ca ahosīti ‘‘samaggabhāvaṃ kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Anu anu taṃsamaṅgino bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti anubhāvo, anubhāvo eva ānubhāvo, patāpo, so pana nesaṃ patāpo hatthiassādivāhanasampattiyā, tattha ca susikkhitabhāvena loke pākaṭo jātoti ‘‘etena…pe… kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tāḷacchiggalenāti kuñcikāchiddena. Asananti saraṃ. Atipātayissantīti atikkāmenti. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti poṅkhassa anupoṅkhaṃ, purimasarassa poṅkhapadānugatapoṅkhaṃ itaraṃ saraṃ katvāti attho. Avirādhitanti avirajjhitaṃ. Ucchindissāmīti ummūlanavasena kulasantatiṃ chindissāmi. Ayanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ ayo, tappaṭikkhepena anayoti āha ‘‘avaḍḍhiyā etaṃ nāma’’nti. Vikkhipatīti vidūrato khipati, apanetīti attho.
“Gaṅgāya”:指在恒河附近。
“Paṭṭanagāma”:指车港村。
“Āṇā”:指命令正在施行。
而“Aḍḍhayojana”是就居住在此港口半由旬范围内的人而言。
“Tatra”:指在那个港口中。
“Balavāghātajāto”:指生起了强烈的愤恨。显示巴利原文
Gaṅgāyanti gaṅgāsamīpe. Paṭṭanagāmanti sakaṭapaṭṭanagāmaṃ. Āṇāti āṇā vattati. Aḍḍhayojananti ca tasmiṃ paṭṭane aḍḍhayojanaṭṭhānavāsino sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tatrāti tasmiṃ paṭṭane. Balavāghātajātoti uppannabalavakodho.
“Me”:指“我的”。“Gatena”:以所行,即由行走。显示巴利原文
Meti mayhaṃ. Gatenāti gamanena.
对国王的不退法的解说。显示巴利原文
Rājaaparihāniyadhammavaṇṇanā
134 “无冷或热”:在那时,凭借诸佛的福德威力,气候恒常冷暖适中,正是就此而那样说的。“Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātā”:常集会。为了显示这种常集会的状态,故说“每天”等语。“Sannipātabahulā”:多数时间集会。“Vosāna”:收敛。“Yāvakīva”:这是一个词,表示不定的限量,此处指时间,因此解释说“凡多少时间”。这是为了通过反显的方式阐明前面所说的“唯有增长”的意义,故说“如不常集会……”等。“Ākulā”:混浊,不清澈。“Bhijjitvā”:从和合的团体中分裂,各各别异。显示巴利原文
134.Sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā natthi, tāyaṃ velāyaṃ puññānubhāvena buddhānaṃ sabbakālaṃ samasītuṇhāva utu hoti, taṃ sandhāya tathā vuttaṃ. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti niccasannipātā, taṃ pana niccasannipātataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘divasassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sannipātabahulāti pacurasannipātā. Vosānanti saṅkocaṃ. ‘‘Yāvakīva’’nti ekamevetaṃ padaṃ aniyamato parimāṇavācī, kālo cettha adhippetoti āha ‘‘yattakaṃ kāla’’nti. ‘‘Vuddhiyevā’’tiādinā vuttamatthaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiṇhaṃ asannipatantā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ākulāti khubhitā, na pasannā. Bhijjitvāti vaggabandhato vibhajja visuṃ visuṃ hutvā.
“Sannipātabheriyā”:意为宣告集会的鼓。“Aḍḍhabhuttā vā”:指已吃了一半,或主人已受食。“Osīdamāne”:指在衰减中、退失中。显示巴利原文
Sannipātabheriyāti sannipātārocanabheriyā. Aḍḍhabhuttā vāti sāmibhuttā ca. Osīdamāneti hāyamāne.
“Pubbe akata”:指先前未造作、未曾产生的。“Suṅka”:指持货行路的人在山脚、渡口、村门等处,应当缴付给国王官员的那份税收。“Bala”:指从成熟庄稼等物中抽取六分之一、七分之一等份额而征得的税。“Daṇḍa”:指依所犯罪过而应收取的罚金,如十迦哈巴那、二十迦哈巴那等。“Vajjidhamma”:指跋耆国的王法。接着,为了详细阐明在未制立与制立等遮止上的过患与功德,而说了“对他们,未制立……”等。“Pāricariyakkhamā”:指能够奉事、能够侍奉。显示巴利原文
Pubbe akatanti pubbe anibbattaṃ. Suṅkanti bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā gacchantehi pabbatakhaṇḍa nadītitthagāmadvārādīsu rājapurisānaṃ dātabbabhāgaṃ. Balinti nipphannasassādito chabhāgaṃ, sattabhāgantiādinā laddhakaraṃ. Daṇḍanti dasavīsatikahāpaṇādikaṃ aparādhānurūpaṃ gahetabbadhanadaṇḍaṃ. Vajjidhammanti vajjirājadhammaṃ. Idāni apaññattapaññāpanādīsu tappaṭikkhepa ādīnavānisaṃse vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ apaññatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Pāricariyakkhamāti upaṭṭhānakkhamā.
“Mahāmattā”(大审官):指因门第、财富、权势等而拥有极大衡量标准的人,他们依循法律论典所立的判决而成为审理大官,即裁决大审官。“给予”(Dentī):指他们给出、作出裁决。“若认为是贼”(Sace coro):指如果他们生起“此人是贼”这样的认知。由于畏惧恶行,他们自己一言不发。“Vohārikā”(法律执行者):指那些专事于称为刑罚的法律事务的人,也就是被称为“法住者”的人。“Suttadharā”(持律者):指持诵法律论典、受命决断这类法律裁决的人。“Aṭṭhakulikā”(八族人伙):指出身于辗转相传的八大家族、远离了非道行径的八位长老贤善之人。显示巴利原文
Kulabhogaissariyādivasena mahatī mattā pamāṇaṃ etesanti mahāmattā, nītisatthavihite vinicchaye ṭhapitā mahāmattā vinicchayamahāmattā, tesaṃ. Dentīti niyyātenti. Sace coroti evaṃsaññino sace honti. Pāpabhīrutāya attanā kiñci avatvā. Daṇḍanītisaññite vohāre niyuttāti vohārikā, ye ‘‘dhammaṭṭhā’’ti vuccanti. Suttadharā nītisuttadharā , īdise vohāravinicchaye niyametvā ṭhapitā. Paramparābhatesu aṭṭhasu kulesu jātā agatigamanaviratā aṭṭhamahallakapurisā aṭṭhakulikā.
“Sakkāra”(恭敬):指恩惠、利益。“建立了尊重心”(Garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā):指一再地建立起“这些人是我们的尊长”这样的尊重之心。“敬重”(Mānenti):指尊敬他们,而这种尊敬是以他们内心的欢喜为前提的,所以说“以心意喜爱他们”。“Nipaccakāra”(敬礼):指躬身礼拜。“显示”(Dassenti):指以“这些是我们的祖父、外祖父”等说法,保持谦卑的心态,表现出尊崇的样子。“保持连结”(Sandhāretu):指使关系不断绝而连结、协调。显示巴利原文
Sakkāranti upakāraṃ. Garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvāti ‘‘ime amhākaṃ garuno’’ti tattha garubhāvaṃ pati pati upaṭṭhapetvā. Mānentīti sammānenti, taṃ pana sammānanaṃ tesu nesaṃ attamanatāpubbakanti āha ‘‘manena piyāyantī’’ti. Nipaccakāranti paṇipātaṃ. Dassentīti ‘‘ime amhākaṃ pitāmahā , mātāmahā’’tiādinā nīcacittā hutvā garucittākāraṃ dassenti. Sandhāretunti sambandhaṃ avicchinnaṃ katvā ghaṭetuṃ.
“强制性的方式”(Pasayhākāra):指用强力、压服的方式。虽然因为“增长”是应受尊敬的法,而说为“增长与退减”(vuddhihāniyo),然而其含义仍应依前述次第来理解;或者,由于经典中说“只有增长可以期待,没有退减”,故依此说为“增长与退减”。显示巴利原文
Pasayhākārassāti balakkārassa. Kāmaṃ vuddhiyā pūjanīyatāya ‘‘vuddhihāniyo’’ti vuttaṃ, attho pana vuttānukkameneva yojetabbo, pāḷiyaṃ vā yasmā ‘‘vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tadanukkamena ‘‘vuddhihāniyo’’ti vuttaṃ.
当恶业未得成熟之机,或其果报尚无现前之处时,天神的侵扰亦无隙可乘;然一旦得机,天神的侵扰便有了可乘之隙,故说“未生起的……令增长”。由此也可了知“未生起的乐”的含义。应知天神临阵时所给的助援,是借由“见己军变为两倍、三倍,见可怖之相”等形相而示现的。显示巴利原文
Vipaccituṃ aladdhokāse pāpakamme, tassa kammassa vipāke vā anavasarova devatopasaggo, tasmiṃ pana laddhokāse siyā devatopasaggassa avasaroti āha ‘‘anuppannaṃ…pe… vaḍḍhentī’’ti. Eteneva anuppannaṃ sukhanti etthāpi attho veditabbo. ‘‘Balakāyassa diguṇatiguṇatādassanaṃ, paṭibhayabhāvadassana’’nti evaṃ ādinā devatānaṃ saṅgāmasīse sahāyatā veditabbā.
“不可意的”(Anicchita):指不可爱、不合意。“由于障碍”(Āvaraṇato):指由于遮止、阻止。“如法的”(Dhammikā):此处指那些不离于法、与法相应的事物,说为“如法的”。“驱猎者”(Vājikā):为猎杀鹿、野猪等,驱赶猎犬等进入山林行走,称为“围猎”、“猎鹿”;从事此业者,或驱赶、带走猎物者,名“驱猎者”,即狩猎为生之人。他询问心的动向,因为心的动向唯有通过身与语的造作,方能显明于世间,作为证验。显示巴利原文
Anicchitanti aniṭṭhaṃ. Āvaraṇatoti nisedhanato. Yassa dhammato anapetā dhammiyāti idha ‘‘dhammikā’’ti vuttā. Migasūkarādighātāya sunakhādīnaṃ kaḍḍhitvā vanacaraṇaṃ vājo, migavā, tattha niyuttā, te vā vājenti nentīti vājikā, migavadhacārino. Cittappavattiṃ pucchati. Kāyikavācasikapayogena hi sā loke pākaṭā pakāsabhūtāti.
135 因具有天神住所的性质,令心崇敬,且为世间人所恭敬之处,故成为塔庙。显示巴利原文
135. Devāyatanabhāvena citattā, lokassa cittīkāraṭṭhānattā ca cetiyaṃ ahosi.
“不应做”(akaraṇīyā):指不应以随意所欲的方式做任何事。而随意所欲,即依手中执持而行,因此说“不应执取”,此即其义。“以面对面战斗”(abhimukhayuddhena):指直接、正面地进行交战。为显示“奉承与亲自赠予”,故说“足够”等语。离间在此处亦为一种方法,故说“除了互相离间”。而战争的不可取,前文已明。“此语”即指“除了奉承,除了互相离间”这句话。由获得世尊说法之途径——“只要……无有退减”这句世尊的开示——得此方法。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃkāravasena kiñcipi na karaṇīyāti akaraṇīyā. Kāmaṃkāro pana hatthagatakaraṇavasenāti āha ‘‘aggahetabbāti attho’’ti. Abhimukhayuddhenāti abhimukhaṃ ujukameva saṅgāmakaraṇena. Upalāpanaṃ sāmaṃ dānañcāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Bhedopi idha upāyo evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatra mithubhedāyā’’ti. Yuddhassa pana anupāyatā pageva pakāsitā. Idanti ‘‘aññatra upalāpanāya, aññatra mithubhedā’’ti ca idaṃ vacanaṃ. Kathāya nayaṃ labhitvāti ‘‘yāvakīvañca…pe… no parihānī’’ti imāya bhagavato kathāya nayaṃ upāyaṃ labhitvā.
“以慈悯”(anukampāya):即对跋耆王族的摄受与护念。“他的”(assa):指世尊的。显示巴利原文
Anukampāyāti vajjirājesu anuggahena. Assāti bhagavato.
「如何」是指与跋耆族应如何作战的论述。「我将使之平直」意思是:将敌对的诸王带来,通过改变城墙与护城河的外观而使其平直。显示巴利原文
Kathanti vajjīhi saddhiṃ kātabbayuddhakathaṃ. Ujuṃ karissāmīti paṭirājāno ānetvā pākāraparikhānaṃ aññathābhāvāpādanena ujubhāvaṃ karissāmi.
「安住于德行者」是说,已稳固立足于师长的德行。文意连接如下:离车族人认为“让有权势者集会去吧,我等是无力之人,去了又能做什么呢”,因此便未前来集会。至于“让勇士们集会吧”这句话,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Patiṭṭhitaguṇoti patiṭṭhitācariyaguṇo. Issarā sannipatantu, mayaṃ anissarā, tattha gantvā kiṃ karissāmāti licchavino na sannipatiṃsūti yojanā. Sūrā sannipatantūti etthāpi eseva nayo.
「军力鼓」是指为作战而击发、令军队集合的战鼓。显示巴利原文
Balabherinti yuddhāya balakāyassa uṭṭhānabheriṃ.
比丘的不退法解释显示巴利原文
Bhikkhuaparihāniyadhammavaṇṇanā
136 “Aparihāniyā”(不退法):由“为不退之利益”得名;或指凭借这些法而不会退堕,故称不退法。又因为这些不退法本身即是导致不退的原因,故经中说“能作不退”。再者,由于这些不退法是那些导致退堕之法的正对治,所以说它们是“增长的因”。世尊的教导能次第照亮智慧之光,驱散众生心中的黑暗,并将应阐明之义,犹如置于掌中的余甘子一般清晰呈现,因此又说“千月之光……我将宣说……” 。显示巴利原文
136. Aparihānāya hitāti aparihāniyā, na parihāyanti etehīti vā aparihāniyā, te pana yasmā aparihāniyā kārakā nāma honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘aparihānikare’’ti. Yasmā pana te parihānikarānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhabhūtā, tasmā āha ‘‘vuddhihetubhūte’’ti. Yasmā bhagavato desanā uparūpari ñāṇālokaṃ pasādentī sattānaṃ hadayandhakāraṃ vidhamati, pakāsetabbe ca atthe hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya suṭṭhutaraṃ pākaṭe katvā dasseti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘candasahassaṃ…pe… kathayissāmī’’ti.
世尊这样想:“当我在那个婆罗门面前宣说跋耆人常集会等行持时,这‘不退法之论’尚导向流转、系属于轮回;然而在我的教法中,也应当说类似的论说,而那应是导向解脱、系属还灭的——藉由这样的论说,在我般涅槃之后,我的教法才能长久住世。”于是世尊召集比丘们,为他们开示不退法,并按照同样的方式加以宣说。所以注释中说“这与《跋耆七法》所说相似”。为了将略说之义详细展开,注释接着说“而在这部经中也是如此……”等。其中,“从那里……”等语,源自从其他方面传来的教法中所记述的那段话。因为那时精舍的结界范围紊乱不明,这才举行了布萨与自恣。显示巴利原文
Yasmā bhagavā ‘‘tassa brāhmaṇassa sammukhā vajjīnaṃ abhiṇhasannipātādipaṭipattiṃ kathentoyeva ayaṃ aparihāniyakathā aniyyānikā vaṭṭanissitā, mayhaṃ pana sāsane tathārūpī kathā kathetabbā, sā hoti niyyānikā vivaṭṭanissitā, yāya sāsanaṃ mayhaṃ parinibbānato parampi addhaniyaṃ assa ciraṭṭhitika’’nti cintesi, tasmā bhikkhū sannipātāpetvā tesaṃ aparihāniye dhamme desento teneva niyāmena desesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ vajjisattake vuttasadisamevā’’ti. Evaṃ saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘idhāpi cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘tato’’tiādi disāsu āgatasāsane vuttaṃ taṃ kathanaṃ. Vihārasīmā ākulā yasmā, tasmā uposathapavāraṇā ṭhitā.
“Olīyamānako”(消沉者):依经文字面而立名;从意义上说,指正在退没的人。“Ukkhipāpentā”(提策者):是指通过使人熟练及义理阐释,而给予提携、策励的人。显示巴利原文
Olīyamānakoti pāḷito, atthato ca vinassamāno. Ukkhipāpentāti paguṇabhāvakaraṇena, atthasaṃvaṇṇanena ca paggaṇhantā.
“应如舍卫城的比丘们那样令其忏悔波逸提”:应如同对舍卫城的比丘们那样,令其发露忏悔波逸提罪(详细事缘见《波罗夷》565)。“如跋耆子们那样以十事因缘说明”:即如跋耆子们那样,以十事来说明(详细事缘见《小品》446)。他们解释说:“Gihigatāni(在家所涉事)指的是与在家人相关的事务。在家人之间流传、被他们所知晓的事情,即是在家所涉事。它只在有烟时存在,所以称为‘烟火时存’(dhūmakālika),因为当火葬柴堆的烟消散之后,它便不再持续。”显示巴利原文
Sāvatthiyaṃ bhikkhū viya pācittiyaṃ desāpetabboti (pārā. 565 vitthāravatthu). Vajjiputtakā viya dasavatthudīpanena (cūḷava. 446 vitthāravatthu). ‘‘Gihigatānīti gihipaṭisaṃyuttānī’’ti vadanti. Gihīsu gatāni, tehi ñātāni gihigatāni. Dhūmakālo etassāti dhūmakālikaṃ citakadhūmavūpasamato paraṃ appavattanato.
“已达坚固”:指于教法中达到稳固、不退转的状态。“由造成长老的因素”:指成就长老地位的戒等功德,即无学法。“多夜”:指出家之后所经历的许多夜晚。在戒等功德中得以确立,即是在教法中成为引导者,因此说“于三学中策励”。显示巴利原文
Thirabhāvappattāti sāsane thirabhāvaṃ anivattitabhāvaṃ upagatā. Therakārakehīti therabhāvasādhakehi sīlādiguṇehi asekkhadhammehi. Bahū rattiyoti pabbajitā hutvā bahū rattiyo jānanti. Sīlādiguṇesu patiṭṭhāpanameva sāsane pariṇāyakatāti āha ‘‘tīsu sikkhāsu pavattentī’’ti.
因为他们并非堪受教法的根器,所以不施教诫。“传统之论”:指经由历代师长传承下来、阐明正确修行之道的法义论说。“核心法门”:指通过成就止、观、道、果而成为精髓的法义体系,例如《觉支善巧》、《无上清凉》、《增上心》等经中所开示的。显示巴利原文
Ovādaṃ na denti abhājanabhāvato. Paveṇīkathanti ācariyaparamparābhataṃ sammāpaṭipattidīpanaṃ dhammakathaṃ. Sārabhūtaṃ dhammapariyāyanti samathavipassanāmaggaphalasampāpanena sārabhūtaṃ bojjhaṅgakosallaanuttarasītībhāvaadhicittasuttādidhammatantiṃ.
“Punabbhavadānaṃ”一词省略了后面的部分,即指“后有”。而“其他者”——那些不为诸缘所左右、不以肉眼为执取对象的人,不会随顺渴爱而转。显示巴利原文
Punabbhavadānaṃ punabbhavo uttarapadalopena. Itareti ye na paccayavasikā na āmisacakkhukā, te na gacchanti taṇhāya vasaṃ.
“在阿兰若处”是指处于森林地带、属于阿兰若范围的住处。难道无论在何处,渴爱不都是有过失的吗?为了回应这一问难,经文说:“因为在村落附近的坐卧具……”等等。藉此表明:就如同在“于无上解脱生起渴望者”这一句中所说的情爱等一样,居于阿兰若处的坐卧具中,那种有所依恋的状态,实属应当修习的部分。显示巴利原文
Āraññakesūti araññabhāgesu araññapariyāpannesu. Nanu yattha katthacipi taṇhā sāvajjā evāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘gāmantasenāsanesu hī’’tiādi, tena ‘‘anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato’’ti ettha vuttasinehādayo viya āraññakesu senāsanesu sālayatā sevitabbapakkhiyā evāti dasseti.
“自己”即是亲自。此言表示:对于那些未受他人劝请、自发而来、尚未到来的清净比丘,期待他们来临;对于已到来的比丘,则期望他们能安乐而住。“以此方式”即是依此行持。“持取未持之法”是指受持尚未领纳的教理法义。“作已持之诵读”是指对已受持的法义,善加思惟其义;因为“诵读”一词本身即含有思惟之义。显示巴利原文
Attanāvāti sayameva, tena parehi anussāhitānaṃ saraseneva anāgatānaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āgamanaṃ, āgatānañca phāsuvihāraṃ paccāsisantīti dasseti. Iminā nīhārenāti imāya paṭipattiyā. Aggahitadhammaggahaṇanti aggahitassa pariyattidhammassa uggahaṇaṃ. Gahitasajjhāyakaraṇanti uggahitassa suṭṭhu atthacintanaṃ. Cintanattho hi sajjhāyasaddo.
“来”即前往。“坐”指铺设座位等而坐下。显示巴利原文
Entīti upagacchanti. Nisīdanti āsanapaññāpanādinā.
137 以应当欢喜从事之义,故种种业处称为“乐处”。“乐于业”,并非热衷于经教之务或寺务管理,而是乐于从事这些事务。“专精”者,以其全心投入,故反复精勤从事。所谓“应作之业”,即比丘们种种高低不同的事务,如考量袈裟等。因此说“即如……”等。“支撑”,指制作双层、三层等,因其为支撑第一层等而作,故如此说。既然如此,为何又遮止这种“乐于业”呢?回答说:“因为有一类人……”等等。显示巴利原文
137. Āramitabbaṭṭhena kammaṃ ārāmo. Kamme ratā, na ganthadhure, vāsadhure vāti kammaratā, anuyuttāti tapparabhāvena punappunaṃ pasutā. Iti kātabbakammanti taṃ taṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kātabbaṃ uccāvacakammaṃ cīvaravicāraṇādi. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathida’’ntiādi. Upatthambhananti dupaṭṭatipaṭṭādikaraṇaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamapaṭalādīnaṃ upatthambhanakāraṇattā tathā vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ ayaṃ kammarāmatā paṭikkhittāti āha ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādi.
“在做时而已”意为:如前面所说的“畜生论”,只是说些无益的话罢了。即使他所说的并非畜生论,此处用决定性的词,是为了显示他心念全然沉浸在那谈话之中。“有节制者”,指能为谈话划定界限、有所节制的人。因为经中说:“说有限量语。”(《长部》)或称为“少语者”,即将言语减至最少,只说绝对必要的话。而证入禅定,才是圣者的沉默。显示巴利原文
Karonto yevāti yathāvuttatiracchānakathaṃ kathentoyeva. Atiracchānakathābhāvepi tassa tattha tapparabhāvadassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇavacanaṃ. Pariyantakārīti sapariyantaṃ katvā vattā. ‘‘Pariyantavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.9, 194) hi vuttaṃ. Appabhasso vāti parimitakathoyeva ekantena kathetabbasseva kathanato. Samāpattisamāpajjanaṃ ariyo tuṇhībhāvo.
「Niddāyatiyeva」:指因看不到沉入睡眠的过患,便只是躺着睡去,不以变换威仪等方式加以驱除。显示巴利原文
Niddāyatiyevāti niddokkamane anādīnavadassī niddāyatiyeva. Iriyāpathaparivattanādinā na naṃ vinodeti.
「Evaṃ saṃsaṭṭho vā」:指如前述那样,因群体杂聚,便只是与群体杂处而共住。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṃsaṭṭho vāti vuttanayena gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya saṃsaṭṭho eva viharati.
「Dussīlā pāpicchā nāmā」:指自己本无戒行,却怀有希求他人称赞不实功德的心念,因此怀有卑劣的恶欲;这些人便称为「恶欲者」。显示巴利原文
Dussīlā pāpicchā nāmāti sayaṃ nissīlā asantaguṇasambhāvanicchāya samannāgatattā pāpā lāmakā icchā etesanti pāpicchā.
因与恶人亲密交往,故名「恶友」;因常与他们一同活动,故名「恶同伴」;因心沉溺其中、倾向他们,故名「恶同侣」。显示巴利原文
Pāpapuggalehi mettikaraṇato pāpamittā. Tehi sadā saha pavattanena pāpasahāyā. Tattha ninnatādinā tadadhimuttatāya pāpasampavaṅkā.
138 他们具备「信」,所以称为「信具足」。「能来信」是指由可导入之道而成就的信;这种信极为殊胜,对于大菩萨而言,不依赖他人的教导,便能对所信的对象无误地深入决意,所以说「这是一切知菩萨所具有的」。「证得信」是指由证悟真理而来的信,就如同须罗班度等人那样。「净信」是指因听闻「世尊是正自觉者」等说法,而对佛陀等生起的信心,就像大劫宾那王等人那样。通过决断投入而相信「正是如此」,这称为「入信」。它有两种:净信与入信。其中,净信仅是听了便生起信心,这类人不会被牵引离去。入信则是深入所信的对象,领会之后,如亲眼所见般生起「确是如此」的信解。因此说,像婆迦梨尊者那样的「信胜解者」,便是具备入信的人。显示巴利原文
138. Saddhā etesaṃ atthīti saddhāti āha ‘‘saddhāsampannā’’ti. Āgamanīyapaṭipadāya āgatasaddhā āgamanīyasaddhā, sā sātisayā mahābodhisattānaṃ paropadesena vinā saddheyyavatthuṃ aviparītato ogāhetvā adhimuccanatoti āha ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ hotī’’ti. Saccapaṭivedhato āgatasaddhā adhigamasaddhā surabandhādīnaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.118; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.suppabuddhakuṭṭhivatthu; udā. aṭṭha. 43) viya. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā buddhādīsu uppajjanakapasādo pasādasaddhā mahākappinarājādīnaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.231; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.mahākappinattheravatthu; theragā. aṭṭha. 2.mahākappinattheragāthāvaṇṇanā, vitthāro) viya. ‘‘Evameta’’nti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā saddahanavasena kappanaṃ okappanaṃ. Duvidhāpīti pasādasaddhāpi okappanasaddhāpi. Tattha pasādasaddhā aparaneyyarūpā hoti savanamattena pasīdanato. Okappanasaddhā saddheyyavatthuṃ ogāhetvā anupavisitvā ‘‘evameta’’nti paccakkhaṃ karontī viya pavattati. Tenāha ‘‘saddhādhimutto vakkalittherasadiso hotī’’ti. Tassa hīti okappanasaddhāya samannāgatassa. Hirī etassa atthīti hiri, hiri mano etesanti hirimanāti āha ‘‘pāpa…pe… cittā’’ti. Pāpato ottappenti ubbijjanti bhāyantīti ottappī.
「多闻」:因其多闻经、偈颂等,故称多闻者。此处提及「闻」仅为举例,因为还应包含记持、熟悉、遍问、观察、见与审虑等。或者说,由于这些都以闻为根本,当知「闻」一词已将其一并摄受。教法指三藏,因希求义利者应当学修,且为成就现法利益等人生的圣典故。谛证悟即对诸谛的彻证,彼亦称为多闻,因其已完成前述多闻的作用。此处意谓,由能带来谛证悟的多闻而成就多闻者之身份,故所指为教法。因此,他是教法多闻者。此多闻有四种,无第五种。「一切处多闻」:不似「依止解脱多闻」等仅为部分,乃是于三藏一切处皆有多闻,因其造作、讲说一切义理,故为一切处多闻。此处所说之人,善巧安立于教法正法中——此教法正是行道与证悟正法的根本。显示巴利原文
Bahu sutaṃ suttageyyādi etenāti bahussuto, sutaggahaṇaṃ cettha nidassanamattaṃ dhāraṇaparicayaparipucchānupekkhanadiṭṭhinijjhānānaṃ pettha icchitabbattā. Savanamūlakattā vā tesampi taggahaṇeneva gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthakāmena pariyāpuṇitabbato, diṭṭhadhammikādipurisatthasiddhiyā pariyattabhāvato ca pariyatti, tīṇi piṭakāni. Saccappaṭivedho saccānaṃ paṭivijjhanaṃ. Tadapi bāhusaccaṃ yathāvuttabāhusaccakiccanipphattito. Pariyatti adhippetā saccapaṭivedhāvahena bāhusaccena bahussutabhāvassa idha icchitattā. Soti pariyattibahussuto. Catubbidho hoti pañcamassa pakārassa abhāvato. Sabbatthakabahussutoti nissayamuccanakabahussutādayo viya padesiko ahutvā piṭakattaye sabbatthakameva bāhusaccasabbhāvato sabbassa atthassa kāyanato kathanato sabbatthakabahussuto. Te idha adhippetā paṭipattipaṭivedhasaddhammānaṃ mūlabhūte pariyattisaddhamme suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato.
“已发勤”(Āraddha):即已提起精进。为阐明两种精进发动的差别,故说“其中”等。此处“独处者”(ekakā),意为独自一人、住于远离处者。显示巴利原文
Āraddhanti paggahitaṃ. Taṃ pana duvidhampi vīriyārambhavibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ekakāti ekākino, vūpakaṭṭhavihārinoti attho.
“问已”(Pucchitvā):向他人询问之后。“令认许”(Sampaṭicchāpetuṃ):即先说出“你名为某甲”,然后令他们回应“是的”,使其认可。如此显示:对于能忆念久远所作等、具备念与慧者,他们不费多大力便得圆满念觉支的修习,故说“针对这样的比丘”。因此复说“又”等。显示巴利原文
Pucchitvāti parato pucchitvā. Sampaṭicchāpetunti ‘‘tvaṃ asukanāmo’’ti vatvā tehi ‘‘āmā’’ti paṭijānāpetunti attho. Evaṃ cirakatādianussaraṇasamatthasatinepakkānaṃ appakasireneva satisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘evarūpe bhikkhū sandhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi.
139 依之而觉,故得名为“菩提”的正见等法之集合,其支分即是“觉支”;殊胜善妙的觉支,则为“正觉支”。“住立相”:指对于身、受、心、法,以不净、苦、无常、无我之自性为相而了别,称为在所缘上住立;以此为相,故为住立相。“择法相”:指对于四圣谛的逼迫等行相,进行简择、审察;以此为相,故为择法相。“策励相”:指依未生善令生起等,对心的策励、激励;以此为相,故为策励相。“遍满相”:指遍满、扩展之性;以此为相,故为遍满相。“寂止相”:指对身心热恼的平息、止息;以此为相,故为寂止相。“不散乱相”:指对散乱的破坏、消除;以此为相,故为不散乱相。“观察相”:指当远离昏沉、掉举的增上心生起时,对于策励、抑制、令喜悦等事不加干预,保持舍与审视;以此为相,故为观察相。显示巴利原文
139. Bujjhati etāyāti ‘‘bodhī’’ti laddhanāmāya sammādiṭṭhiādidhammasāmaggiyā aṅgoti bojjhaṅgo, pasattho, sundaro vā bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo. Upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇoti kāyavedanācittadhammānaṃ asubhadukkhāniccānattabhāvasallakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ ārammaṇe upaṭṭhānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇo. Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ pīḷanādippakārato vicayo upaparikkhā lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti pavicayalakkhaṇo. Anuppannā kusalānuppādanādivasena cittassa paggaho paggaṇhanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti paggahalakkhaṇo. Pharaṇaṃ vipphārikatā lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti pharaṇalakkhaṇo. Upasamo kāyacittapariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti upasamalakkhaṇo. Avikkhepo vikkhepaviddhaṃsanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti avikkhepalakkhaṇo. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte pavattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭattā ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇo.
「由四种原因」指:念与正知、远离失念者、亲近具念者、心倾向于此——这四种。
「由六种原因」指:勤于遍问、清净事物、诸根的平衡成就、远离劣慧者、亲近具慧者、心倾向于此——这六种。而在《大念处注释》中,则会在加入「甚深智行所作意」这一原因后,说为「由七种原因」,应知如此。
「由九种原因」指:恶趣怖畏作意、行道作意、对团食的恭敬、遗产伟大之作意、导师伟大之作意、同梵行者伟大之作意、远离懈怠者、亲近勤精进者、心倾向于此——这九种。在《大念处注释》中,则会加上「见功德」与「出生伟大之作意」,说为「由十一种」。
「由十种原因」指:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、施随念、天随念、寂止随念、远离粗弊者、亲近柔和者、心倾向于此——这十种。在《大念处注释》中,则会加上「可净信经典之作意」,说为「由十一种」。
「由七种原因」指:受用细软之食、受用适宜气候之乐、受用威仪之乐、保持中道之行、远离身疲劳者、亲近身轻安者、心倾向于此——这七种。
「由十种原因」指:清净事物、诸根平衡成就、善巧于相、适时激励心、适……显示巴利原文
Catūhi kāraṇehīti satisampajaññaṃ, muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanā, upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi. Chahi kāraṇehīti paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi chahi kāraṇehi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘sattahi kāraṇehī’’ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) vakkhati, taṃ gambhīrañāṇacariyāpaccavekkhaṇāti imaṃ kāraṇaṃ pakkhipitvā veditabbaṃ. Navahi kāraṇehīti apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇā, gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇā, piṇḍapātassa apacāyanatā, dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇā, satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇā, sabrahmacārīmahattapaccavekkhaṇā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi navahi kāraṇehi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) pana ānisaṃsadassāvitā, jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇāti imehi saddhiṃ ‘‘ekādasā’’ti vakkhati. Dasahi kāraṇehīti buddhānussati, dhammānussati, saṅghasīlacāgadevatāupasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanā, siniddhapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi dasahi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) pana pasādaniyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇāya saddhiṃ ‘‘ekādasā’’ti vakkhati. Sattahi kāraṇehīti paṇītabhojanasevanatā , utusukhasevanatā, iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattapayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā , passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi sattahi. Dasahi kāraṇehīti vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, nimittakusalatā, samaye cittassa paggahaṇaṃ, samaye cittassa niggahaṇaṃ, samaye cittassa sampahaṃsanaṃ, samaye cittassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanaṃ, samāhitapuggalasevanaṃ, tadadhimuttatāti imehi dasahi kāraṇehi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) pana ‘‘jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇā’’ti iminā saddhiṃ ‘‘ekādasahī’’ti vakkhati. Pañcahi kāraṇehīti sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi pañcahi kāraṇehi. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) āgamissati. Kāmaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammā nāma nippariyāyato ariyamaggasampayuttā eva niyyānikabhāvato. Suttantadesanā nāma pariyāyakathāti ‘‘iminā vipassanā…pe… kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ.
140 「无常随观」:对三界诸行,以「无常」进行随观,如此生起的观即是无常随观。因为此观是借由与之俱生的想被修习而得以显发,所以说为「与无常随观俱生之想」——这其实是以想的名称来指代观。在「无我想」等中,道理也是如此。世间观也是存在的,因为它们借助「无常」等方式进行观察。「世间观亦」这一短语中的「亦」字,意味着此处也有混合;由此确定这层含义后,为了显示其自性,便说「离欲」等等。其中,根据经文的表述,在该处「离欲、灭尽」被说为涅槃,所以这里所说的「离欲想、灭尽想」也能以涅槃为所缘。因此说「也有两种出世间者」。显示巴利原文
140. Tebhūmake saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti anupassati etāyāti aniccānupassanā, tathā pavattā vipassanā, sā pana yasmā attanā sahagatasaññāya bhāvitāya vibhāvitā eva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aniccānupassanāya saddhiṃ uppannasaññā’’ti. Saññāsīsena vāyaṃ vipassanāya eva niddeso. Anattasaññādīsupi eseva nayo. Lokiyavipassanāpi honti, yasmā ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā tā pavattantīti. Lokiyavipassanāpīti pi-saddena missakāpettha santīti atthato āpannanti atthāpattisiddhamatthaṃ niddhāretvā sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘virāgo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āgatavasenāti tathā āgatapāḷivasena ‘‘virāgo nirodho’’ti hi tattha nibbānaṃ vuttanti idha ‘‘virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā’’ti vuttasaññā nibbānārammaṇāpi siyuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dve lokuttarāpi hontī’’ti.
141 「慈」存在于他,这样的心就是「慈」心。由此发起的身体行为,便是「慈的身业」。其余语业、意业也同理。这些慈的身业等,是针对比丘而说的,因为比丘是最殊胜的团体。然而正如在比丘中可得,在居士中同样可得,因为这是四众所共通的。为了显示这一点,而说「对于比丘们……」等。虽然通过听闻最初的梵行法也能获得慈的身业等,但严格来说,通过行持法的听闻,才是这里所期望的。为显示这个意义,而说「等行法的圆满」等等。乃至三藏佛语,当以遍问、释义的方式流传时,也应出于利益的动机而流传。显示巴利原文
141. Mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, cittaṃ. Taṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyakammaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Esa nayo sesadvayepi. Imānipi mettākāyakammādīni bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni tesaṃ seṭṭhaparisabhāvato. Yathā pana bhikkhūsupi labbhanti, evaṃ gihīsupi labbhanti catuparisasādhāraṇattāti taṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhūnañhī’’tiādimāha. Kāmaṃ ādibrahmacariyakadhammassavanenapi mettākāyakammāni labbhanti, nippariyāyato pana cārittadhammassavanena ayamattho icchitoti dassento ‘‘ābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇa’’nti āha. Tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ paripucchanaatthakathanavasena pavattiyamānaṃ hitajjhāsayena pavattitabbato.
“Āvī”意为公开、显露。此处公开性是指:为某人作身业时,那人在面前,故说“当面”。“Raho”意为不公开、少显露。其不公开性是指:为某人作身业时,那人不在眼前,故说“背面”。以同伴身份前往,即在他们面前。“对两者”,指对新学比丘和长老两者。显示巴利原文
Āvīti pakāsaṃ, pakāsabhāvo cettha yaṃ uddissa taṃ kāyakammaṃ karīyati, tassa sammukhabhāvatoti āha ‘‘sammukhā’’ti. Rahoti appakāsaṃ, appakāsatā ca yaṃ uddissa taṃ kāyakammaṃ karīyati, tassa paccakkhābhāvatoti āha ‘‘parammukhā’’ti. Sahāyabhāvagamanaṃ tesaṃ purato. Ubhayehīti navakehi, therehi ca.
“举起”,即向上托举而使之高起。显示巴利原文
Paggayhāti paggaṇhitvā uccaṃ katvā.
固然,慈爱温润的眼睁开,以明净面容注视,这本身就是慈的身业。然而,若依某种心,眼才有慈爱温润,面容才有明净,正是针对此心而说“这是慈的意业”。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ mettāsinehasiniddhānaṃ nayanānaṃ ummīlanā, pasannena mukhena olokanañca mettaṃ kāyakammameva, yassa pana cittassa vasena nayanānaṃ mettāsinehasiniddhatā, mukhassa ca pasannatā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāmā’’ti.
“利得”一词是业依主释,如同在“利得已得”中的用法。此处因有“如法而得”之说,故为过去时,因此说“衣等已得的资具”。从法而来,即是如法的,因此说“如法所得”。正是为了显示这一意义,才说“欺诈”等。先以心分配,再以身分配;为了显示根源,说“这样,以心分配”,这是表明不应仅因心生一念就认为已做了分配。“未分配”是中性名词的修习语;而“受用未分配之利得”则是业依主释。显示巴利原文
Lābhasaddo kammasādhano ‘‘lābhāvata, lābho laddho’’tiādīsu viya, so cettha ‘‘dhammaladdhā’’ti vacanato atītakālikoti āha ‘‘cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā’’ti. Dhammato āgatāti dhammikā. Tenāha ‘‘dhammaladdhā’’ti. Imameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kuhanādī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittena vibhajanapubbakaṃ kāyena vibhajananti mūlameva dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ cittena vibhajana’’nti vuttaṃ, tena cittuppādamattenapi paṭivibhāgo na kātabboti dasseti. Appaṭivibhattanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, appaṭivibhattaṃ vā lābhaṃ bhuñjatīti kammaniddeso eva.
他不把那份利得施予在家人,是为了清净自己的活命。他不自己受用,即自己不享用,心想“愿我不成为独享者”。“当接受时……见”等文字,显示他将利得在三个时间点都置于共用状态:“当接受时,愿此与僧团共用”——显示接受当下;“取后……见”——显示接受之后;而若接受之前没有这种用意,这两者便不能成立,因此接受之前的时间在义理上也得以成立。具体来说:在接受前,他有“愿与僧团共用,我将接受”的心念;正接受时,有“愿与僧团共用,我正接受”的心念;接受后,有“愿与僧团共用,我已接受”的心念。如此令所得利得具足这三时特征,不毁坏最后共用特征而受用的人,即称为“共受用者”,也称为“不别分受用者”。显示巴利原文
Taṃtaṃ neva gihīnaṃ deti attano ājīvasodhanatthaṃ. Na attanā bhuñjatīti attanāva na paribhuñjati ‘‘mayhaṃ asādhāraṇabhogitā mā hotū’’ti. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhanto ca…pe… passatī’’ti iminā tassa lābhassa tīsupi kālesu sādhāraṇato ṭhapanaṃ dassitaṃ. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhanto ca saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotū’’ti iminā paṭiggahaṇakālo dassito, ‘‘gahetvā…pe… passatī’’ti iminā paṭiggahitakālo, tadubhayaṃ pana tādisena pubbābhogena vinā na hotīti atthasiddho purimakālo. Tayidaṃ paṭiggahaṇato pubbe vassa hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggahessāmī’’ti. Paṭiggaṇhantassa hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggaṇhāmī’’ti. Paṭiggahetvā hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggahitaṃ mayā’’ti evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampannaṃ katvā laddhalābhaṃ osānalakkhaṇaṃ avikopetvā paribhuñjanto sādhāraṇabhogī, appaṭivibhattabhogī ca hoti.
所谓“此应忆念法”,即指这第四项应忆念的法。因为……戒不清净的人根本不会有共受用,因此连开头都不可能存在,更遑论圆满——这是它的意旨。其中,“具足清净戒者”这一句,显示利得的如法性;“不破行持者”这一句,显示不别分受用与共受用。当这两者都具备时,应忆念法也就圆满了,故说“圆满”。如果作“特定分与”——也就是不作不特定的分与,而是从父亲、亲教师、和尚等人开始,或依长老的次第分施,这样仍然算是应忆念法。但如果对应当照顾的处所作特定分与,那就不是应忆念法,因为已成“特定分与”。因此才说“那便成为障碍照顾”等。若如此,已圆满应忆念法的人,难道就完全不能作特定分与吗?并非不能,在适当处是开许的。为了显示这一点,接着说“然而他……”等语。对病人等所作的特定分与布施,并不属于不别分的范畴,因为它没有“我不给某人”这样的拒绝。分别的本质,就是以排他为特征。因此说“剩余者……”等句。而“即使不给”一句中的“亦”字,显示给也可以,但那应是出于怜悯,而不是为了完成行持。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammanti imaṃ catutthaṃ saritabbayuttadhammaṃ. Na hi…pe… gaṇhanti, tasmā sādhāraṇabhogitā eva dussīlassa natthīti ārambhopi tāva na sambhavati, kuto pūraṇanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Parisuddhasīlo’’ti iminā lābhassa dhammikabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vattaṃ akhaṇḍento’’ti iminā appaṭivibhattabhogitaṃ, sādhāraṇabhogitañca dasseti. Sati pana tadubhaye sāraṇīyadhammo pūrito eva hotīti āha ‘‘pūretī’’ti. ‘‘Odissakaṃkatvā’’ti etena anodissakaṃ katvā pituno, ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā therāsanato paṭṭhāya dentassa sāraṇīyadhammoyeva hotīti. Sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hotīti paṭijagganaṭṭhāne odissakaṃ katvā dinnattā. Tenāha ‘‘palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hotī’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassa odissakadānaṃ na vaṭṭatīti? No na vaṭṭati yuttaṭṭhāneti dassento ‘‘tena panā’’tiādimāha. Gilānādīnaṃ odissakaṃ katvā dānaṃ appaṭivibhāgapakkhikaṃ ‘‘asukassa na dassāmī’’ti paṭikkhepassa abhāvato. Byatirekappadhāno hi paṭivibhāgo. Tenāha ‘‘avasesa’’ntiādi. Adātumpīti pi-saddena dātumpi vaṭṭatīti dasseti, tañca kho karuṇāyanavasena, na vattapūraṇavasena.
“善学”:指对应忆念法圆满的方式已经善加学习,也就是极为善巧的意思。现在为了显示她的善巧,所以说“若善学……”等。用“十二年间才圆满,不在那之前”这句话,显示它很难圆满。确实,它有大果报、大利益,即使在现世中也伴随有更重大的果与利益。而具足这一法的人,就像圣者一样,在世间稀有,具足未曾有法。正因如此,他舍弃了布施福与持戒福的极难断除的敌对法,将其远远地镇伏,以极为清净的心,在世间成为显著、知名而安住。为了通过遮遣与随顺来阐明这个义理,所以说了“如果……”等,这部分容易了解。显示巴利原文
Susikkhitāyāti sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇavidhimhi suṭṭhu sikkhitāya, sukusalāyāti attho. Idāni tassā kosallaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘susikkhitāya hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dvādasahi vassehi pūrati, na tato ora’’nti iminā tassa duppūraṇaṃ dasseti. Tathā hi so mahapphalo mahānisaṃso, diṭṭhadhammikehipi tāva garutarehi phalānisaṃsehi ca anugato. Taṃsamaṅgī ca puggalo visesalābhī ariyapuggalo viya loke acchariyabbhutadhammasamannāgato hoti. Tathā hi so duppajahaṃ dānamayassa, sīlamayassa ca puññassa paṭipakkhadhammaṃ sudūre vikkhambhitaṃ katvā suvisuddhena cetasā loke pākaṭo paññāto hutvā viharati, tassimamatthaṃ byatirekato, anvayato ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sace hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
现在,为了显示他们来世与现世的利益,所以说“如是……”等。既没有嫉妒,也没有悭吝,因为长久的修习已将其涤除。受众人爱戴,因为他以施舍与持戒而得清净。因此说:“施者受爱戴,众人亲近彼”(《增支部》5.34)。容易获得资具,因为布施的缘故;对于志向广大的人来说,获得资具正是布施在现世的利益。已归属于僧团的东西不会再损耗,因为借着归僧的方式,那十二年的大钵已无间断地圆满。日复一日获得最上的物品,因为他的布施是从最上的应供者开始施与的。恐怖等不会生起,因为在布施圆满时,他长时没有对自己的顾虑,以无贪着的心使心清净,不再对所施物和受施者作种种分别。显示巴利原文
Idāni ye samparāyike, diṭṭhadhammike ca ānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Neva issā, na macchariyaṃ hoti cirakālabhāvanāya vidhutabhāvato. Manussānaṃ piyo hoti pariccāgasīlatāya visuddhattā. Tenāha ‘‘dadaṃ piyo hoti bhajanti naṃ bahū’’tiādi (a. ni. 5.34). Sulabhapaccayo hoti dānavasena uḷārajjhāsayānaṃ paccayalābhassa idhānisaṃsabhāvato dānassa. Pattagataṃ assa diyyamānaṃna khīyati pattagatavasena dvādasavassikassa mahāpattassa avicchedena pūritattā. Aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati devasikaṃ dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ aggato paṭṭhāya dānassa dinnattā. Bhayevā…pe… āpajjanti deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappaṃ akatvā attani nirapekkhacittena cirakālaṃ dānapūratāya pasāditacittattā.
“于彼中”:指在那些应当阐明的利益当中。“这些”是说明此事的根据和理由。“虽不得者”:由于福德不大,即使没有获得这些利益,也能了知与乞食行道相应、同类、随顺的部分。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tesu ānisaṃsesu vibhāvetabbesu. Imāni taṃ dīpanāni vatthūni kāraṇāni. Alabhantāpīti amahāpuññatāya na lābhino samānāpi. Bhikkhācāramaggasabhāganti sabhāgaṃ tabbhāgiyaṃ bhikkhācāramaggaṃ jānanti.
因为这是超越常人之法,也为消除长老们的疑惑,他说:“尊者,我已圆满了和合法。”正因为如此,在第二个事例中,长老也自己表露了此事。也由于众人爱戴、资具易得等缘故,这个事例同样适用。而为了特别彰显“归于僧团的物品不再损耗”之义,才说“这是……乃至……在此处是事例”。显示巴利原文
Anuttarimanussadhammattā, therānaṃ saṃsayavinodanatthañca ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammo me bhante pūrito’’ti āha. Tathā hi dutiyavatthusmimpi therena attā pakāsito. Manussānaṃ piyatāya, sulabhapaccayatāyapi idaṃ vatthumeva. Pattagatākhīyanassa pana visesaṃ vibhāvanato ‘‘idaṃ tāva…pe… ettha vatthu’’nti vuttaṃ.
“于山货大供养时”:在塔庙山,以及全楞伽岛和一由旬范围的大海中,除去船堆等物,以灯、花、香等举行的盛大供养。“乃至以方便”:就是以某种方式。“相应”:由于圆满了和合法,如此如实的宣说,对你们也是相称的,这是词义。显示巴利原文
Giribhaṇḍamahāpūjāyāti cetiyagirimhi sakalalaṅkādīpe, yojanappamāṇe samudde ca nāvāsaṅghāṭādike ṭhapetvā dīpapupphagandhādīhi kariyamānamahāpūjāyaṃ. Pariyāyenapīti lesenapi. Anucchavikanti sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇatopi idaṃ yathābhūtappavedanaṃ tumhākaṃ anucchavikanti attho.
因为惧怕盗贼,他们没有告知就逃走了。并且说:“因为他们自己谋生艰难”等等。显示巴利原文
Anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu corabhayena. ‘‘Attano dujjīvikāyā’’ti ca vadanti.
“vaṭṭissatīti”意为“合适、可行”。长老尼圆满成就了和合法;而由于长老的戒德威力,诸天便为此事付出努力。显示巴利原文
Vaṭṭissatīti kappissati. Therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi, therassa pana sīlatejeneva devatā ussukkaṃ āpajji.
因为没有那些破损,所以称为「无破损(akhaṇḍāni)」。但是,为了显示那些破损,才说“若……”。在这里,对于已受具足戒的人的戒,应按照诵戒的次序来了知它的始末;因此说“七……”等。对于未受具足戒的人的戒,按照受持的次序也能得到始末。如同边缘破损的衣服(pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti):就好比边端或边缘被割破的衣服,这是一个不同类的譬喻,因为这里所说的「无破损」已经成就了。其余的譬喻也是同样的道理。破断裂开的状态就叫「破损(khaṇḍa)」,如果有这种现象,就称为破损,这是指戒而言。在「有孔(chidda)」等表达中,也是同样的理解方式。如同在中间被刺破,从而出现异样颜色的牛(vemajjhe bhinnaṃ vinivijjhanavasena visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyā),这是相联系的。没有斑点(sabala),所以称为「无斑点(asabalāni)」。同样的,也称为「无杂色(akammāsāni)」。戒能够把人从渴爱的奴役状态中解脱出来,也就是导向出离的依止状态。因为具备这种戒的人是自在者、自主者、自由者,所以戒也被称为「自由(bhujissāni)」。因此说“由自由状态的原因,所以称为自由”。由于极其清净而值得称赞,所以称为「智者所称赞(viññupasatthāni)」。凭借这种戒,有人会认为“我可以成为天神或某种天人”,并生起“常、恒、永住”或“由戒清净”等想法,但这种戒不会被这些渴爱与邪见所执取。通过指出“这就是你戒上的过失”,在四种退失中,用任何一种退失的显现,让执着者无法动摇。它能起到导向定的作用,所以称为「导向定的(samādhisaṃvattanikāni)」。显示巴利原文
Natthi etesaṃ khaṇḍanti akhaṇḍāni. Taṃ pana nesaṃ khaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha upasampannasīlānaṃ uddesakkamena ādi antā veditabbā. Tenāha ‘‘sattasū’’tiādi. Anupasampannasīlānaṃ pana samādānakkamenapi ādi antā labbhanti. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ cetaṃ ‘‘akhaṇḍānī’’ti imassa adhigatattā. Evaṃ sesānipi udāharaṇāni. Khaṇḍitabhinnatā khaṇḍaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti khaṇḍaṃ, sīlaṃ. ‘‘Chidda’’ntiādīsupi eseva nayo. Vemajjhe bhinnaṃ vinivijjhanavasena visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyāti sambandho. Sabalarahitāni asabalāni. Tathā akammāsāni. Sīlassa taṇhādāsabyato mocanaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayabhāvāpādanaṃ. Yasmā ca taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo serī sayaṃvasī bhujisso nāma hoti, tasmāpi bhujissāni. Tenevāha ‘‘bhujissabhāvakāraṇatobhujissānī’’ti. Suparisuddhabhāvena pāsaṃsattā viññupasatthāni. Imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhaveyyaṃ, devaññataro vā, tattha ‘‘nicco dhuvo sassato’’ti, ‘‘sīlena suddhī’’ti ca evaṃ ādinā taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā. ‘‘Ayaṃ te sīlesu doso’’ti catūsupi vipattīsu yāya kāyaci vipattiyā dassanena parāmaṭṭhuṃ anuddhaṃsetuṃ. Samādhisaṃvattanappayojanāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni.
“共相成就之戒”:由戒的成就而达到相同状态、行持一致的戒。固然,凡夫的四遍净戒可能没有差异,但这并非绝对;而此道戒则是绝对、决定性的,因此说“道戒上毫无差异”。这段话即是针对道戒而说“那些种种戒……”等语的。显示巴利原文
Samānabhāvūpagatasīlāti sīlasampattiyā samānabhāvaṃ upagatasīlā sabhāgavuttikā. Kāmaṃ puthujjanānañca catupārisuddhisīle nānattaṃ na siyā, taṃ pana na ekantikaṃ, idaṃ ekantikaṃ niyatabhāvatoti āha ‘‘natthi maggasīle nānatta’’nti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttanti maggasīlaṃ sandhāya etaṃ ‘‘yāni tāni sīlānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“以彼”(yāyanti)者,即我与你们所现量体证者。“见”(diṭṭhīti)即道正见。“无过失”(niddosāti)者,谓已抖落过失,断尽贪等不善法。“出离”(niyyātīti)者,从轮回之苦中脱离、超出;因自能出离,故说“令具足此者从轮回苦中出离”。凡遵循导师教诫而行者,即是“彼作者”(takkaro),也就是依教修行的人。“同见”(samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ)者,即见解相同之状态,由证悟真理而达到无别之见。“唯增长”(vuddhiyeva)者,于圣者律法中唯有功德增长而无退减,此即不退法之教示。在此,世尊为令教法久住,而开示了此决定性。显示巴利原文
Yāyanti yā ayaṃ mayhañceva tumhākañca paccakkhabhūtā . Diṭṭhīti maggasammādiṭṭhi. Niddosāti nidhutadosā, samucchinnarāgādipāpadhammāti attho. Niyyātīti vaṭṭadukkhato nissarati nigacchati. Sayaṃ niyyantasseva hi ‘‘taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāpetī’’ti vuccati. Yā satthu anusiṭṭhi, taṃ karotīti takkaro, tassa, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjanakassāti attho. Samānadiṭṭhibhāvanti sadisadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ saccasampaṭivedhena abhinnadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ. Vuddhiyevāti ariyavinaye guṇehi vuḍḍhiyeva, no parihānīti ayaṃ aparihāniyadhammadesanā attanopi sāsanassa addhaniyataṃ ākaṅkhantena bhagavatā idha desitā.
142 「因为接近般涅槃」:这是指再过一年多几个月就要般涅槃了,所以才这么说。「iti sīlaṃ(这就是戒)」等,正是「iti sīlaṃ」等。其中「iti」一词兼具方式义与限量义,合在一起理解,所以说「这样的戒,如此量的戒」。「这样的戒」指如此分类的戒。「如此量」指这是最上的,没有比这更多的。「四遍清净戒」:即作为道之资粮的世间四遍清净戒。对于「心一境性就是定」等,也是同样的道理。「住于哪种戒而…」:即住于作为出世间善之近因的戒,正如所说的「他先已令身业、语业、活命都极清净」(《中部》3.431;《论事》874),立足于这样的戒。「此」指道果定。「修习」:即以此戒完全地修习、完全地积累。成为大果、大功德:其中,道定主要以沙门果而为大果,以止息轮回的苦而为大功德;其余的果定则依寂止与断除而为大果,依证得寂灭的乐而为大功德。「住于哪种定而…」:即住于作为出世间善之近因的近行禅那定与出起定中。「此」即道果慧。「以此修习」:即依前面所说的定完全地修习、完全地积累。大果、大功德的意思,可以按照定中所说的道理来理解。而且,应当知道这些戒、定、慧,由于能分别觉支、道支、禅支而为大果,由于能分别七种应供养的人而为大功德。「住于哪种慧而…」:即住于这种观慧,或者止观慧中。因为对于止行者来说,与定俱起的慧也确实成为证道的殊胜缘。「正」:即善巧地,令诸漏丝毫不剩,这样完全从诸漏中解脱。这是针对最上道刹那而说的。显示巴利原文
142.Āsannaparinibbānattāti katipayamāsādhikena saṃvaccharamattena parinibbānaṃ bhavissatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Etaṃyevāti ‘‘iti sīla’’ntiādikaṃyeva iti sīlanti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, parimāṇattho ca ekajjhaṃ katvā gahitoti āha ‘‘evaṃ sīlaṃ ettakaṃ sīla’’nti. Evaṃ sīlanti evaṃ pabhedaṃ sīlaṃ. Ettakanti etaṃ paramaṃ, na ito bhiyyo. Catupārisuddhisīlanti maggassa sambhārabhūtaṃ lokiyacatupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Cittekaggatā samādhīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yasmiṃ sīle ṭhatvāti yasmiṃ lokuttarakusalassa padaṭṭhānabhūte ‘‘pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ ājīvo suparisuddho hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.431; kathā. 874) evaṃ vuttasīle patiṭṭhāya. Esoti maggaphalasamādhi. Paribhāvitoti tena sīlena sabbaso bhāvito sambhāvito. Mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṃsoti maggasamādhi tāva sāmaññaphalehi mahapphalo, vaṭṭadukkhavūpasamena mahānisaṃso. Itaro paṭippassaddhippahānena mahapphalo, nibbutisukhuppattiyā mahānisaṃso. Yamhi samādhimhiṭhatvāti yasmiṃ lokuttarakusalassa padaṭṭhānabhūte pādakajjhānasamādhimhi ceva vuṭṭhānagāminisamādhimhi ca ṭhatvā. Sāti maggaphalapaññā. Tena paribhāvitāti tena yathāvuttasamādhinā sabbaso bhāvitā paribhāvitā. Mahapphalamahānisaṃsatā samādhimhi vuttanayena veditabbā. Api ca te bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānaṅgappabhedahetutāya mahapphalā sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggalavibhāgahetutāya mahānisaṃsāti veditabbā. Yāya paññāya ṭhatvāti yāyaṃ vipassanāpaññāyaṃ, samādhivipassanāpaññāyaṃ vā ṭhatvā. Samathayānikassa hi samādhisahagatāpi paññā maggādhigamāya visesapaccayo hotiyeva. Sammadevāti suṭṭhuyeva yathā āsavānaṃ lesopi nāvasissati, evaṃ sabbaso āsavehi vimuccati. Aggamaggakkhaṇañhi sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
143 如同世间通用词语一样,应当知道「abhiranta(喜好)」这个词的成立方式。因为「abhirantaṃ」、「abhirataṃ」、「abhirati」实际上意义相同。而这个「abhiranta」是「喜好」的同义词,不是「耽著」的同义词。因为,如果是以耽著而住在某处,当耽著的对象消失时,他可能会在那地方产生不乐;而这种情形在诸漏尽者身上是没有的,佛陀就更不用说了,因此说「佛陀……没有……」。如果说是因为喜好而住于某处,由于后来失去了喜好而转到别处去,佛陀不会有这种事。但是,为了调伏应度化的人,佛陀会在某处住下来,等那件事完成之后,就只是为了调伏应度者而从那里去往另一处;这就是此处所说随顺喜好的意思。在「āyāmā」这个词中,「ā」这个前缀与「āgacchā」同义,所以意思是「来,我们走」。而在「ayāmā」的读法中,a仅仅是语助词。称唤长老是因为他住在近处,并非当时没有住在大师身边的比丘。实际上,那时在世尊身边的比丘僧团是无法计数的,所以说「与大比丘僧团一起」。「赴芒果苗圃」:这是指有关前往芒果苗圃的经文。「赴华氏城」:也是同样的道理。前后直接相连的意义很清楚,而且前面也已经注释过了。显示巴利原文
143. Lokiyatthasaddānaṃ viya abhiranta-saddassa siddhi daṭṭhabbā. Abhirantaṃ abhirataṃ abhiratīti hi atthato ekaṃ. Abhiranta-saddo cāyaṃ abhirucipariyāyo, na assādapariyāyo. Assādavasena hi katthaci vasantassa assādavatthuvigamena siyā tassa tattha anabhirati, yadidaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ natthi, pageva buddhānanti āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ…pe… natthī’’ti. Abhirativasena katthaci vasitvā tadabhāvato aññattha gamanaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ natthi. Veneyyavinayanatthaṃ pana katthaci vasitvā tasmiṃ siddhe veneyyavinayanatthameva tato aññattha gacchanti, ayamettha yathāruci. Āyāmāti ettha ā-saddo ‘‘āgacchā’’ti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘ehi yāmā’’ti. Ayāmāti pana pāṭhe a-kāro nipātamattaṃ. Santikāvacarattā theraṃ ālapati, na pana tadā satthu santike vasantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvato. Aparicchinnagaṇano hi tadā bhagavato santike bhikkhusaṅgho . Tenāha ‘‘mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhi’’nti. Ambalaṭṭhikāgamananti ambalaṭṭhikāgamanapaṭisaṃyuttapāṭhamāha. Pāṭaligamaneti etthāpi eseva nayo. Uttānameva anantaraṃ, heṭṭhā ca saṃvaṇṇitarūpattā.
舍利弗狮子吼的注释显示巴利原文
Sāriputtasīhanādavaṇṇanā
145 「具寿舍利弗」等文句。关于「净信」,在《净信经》(《长部》3.141)的古注中已有详细解释,因此我们也打算在那部经中从义理上对它作详细阐释,这是此处的意旨。显示巴利原文
145.‘‘Āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi pāṭhajātaṃ. Sampasādanīyeti sampasādanīyasutte (dī. ni. 3.141) vitthāritaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, tasmā mayampi tattheva naṃ atthato vitthārayissāmāti adhippāyo.
关于无道德者过患的解释显示巴利原文
Dussīlaādīnavavaṇṇanā
148 「住所」是指客人来此居住之处,即那房屋,故说「住所房舍」,意为客人的住处。「两位国王」指离车王与摩揭陀王。「伙伴们」指仆从。「家人」指眷属。「铺盖」:铺展开来,全部铺开即是完全铺盖,指那完全铺盖。此词是抽象名词的中性形式。因此解释说「如同全部铺开那样」。显示巴利原文
148. Āgantvā vasanti ettha āgantukāti āvasatho, tadeva agāranti āha ‘‘āvasathāgāranti āgantukānaṃ āvasathageha’’nti. Dvinnaṃrājūnanti licchavirājamagadharājūnaṃ. Sahāyakāti sevakā. Kulānīti kuṭumbike. Santhatanti santhari, sabbaṃ santhari sabbasanthari, taṃ sabbasanthariṃ. Bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso cāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā sabbaṃ santhataṃ hoti, eva’’nti.
149 「无戒」中的「无」字,如「无慧」等词中一样,表示「没有」之义,并非表示谴责,故说「无戒、无戒行」。关于「破律仪」:凡是领受了戒却因某种原因而破坏了戒的人,他即是破律仪者。然而,那些全然不受戒、毫无行持的人,又怎能称为破律仪呢?他也因为破坏行持与防护,同样称为破律仪者。因为「失坏律仪」的意思就是没有律仪。显示巴利原文
149.Dussīloti ettha du-saddo abhāvattho ‘‘duppañño’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.449; a. ni. 5.10) viya, na garahatthoti āha ‘‘asīlo nissīlo’’ti. Bhinnasaṃvaroti ettha yo samādinnasīlo kenaci kāraṇena sīlabhedaṃ patto, so tāva bhinnasaṃvaro hoti. Yo pana sabbena sabbaṃ asamādinnasīlo ācārahīno, so kathaṃ bhinnasaṃvaro nāma hotīti? Sopi sādhusamācārassa parihāniyassa bheditattā bhinnasaṃvaro eva nāma. Vissaṭṭhasaṃvaro saṃvararahitoti hi vuttaṃ hoti.
各个技艺场所。‘禁杀日’是指已经发布‘切勿杀生’这类禁杀通告的日子。显示巴利原文
Taṃ taṃ sippaṭṭhānaṃ. Māghātakāleti ‘‘mā ghātetha pāṇino’’ti evaṃ māghātāti ghosanaṃ ghositadivase.
恶名声便会流传开来。显示巴利原文
Abbhuggacchati pāpako kittisaddo.
由于追悔,内心必定会感到沮丧。显示巴利原文
Ajjhāsayena maṅku hotiyeva vippaṭisāribhāvato.
「他的」是指破戒者的。「受持后现行处」意为起身努力之后所造作的行为。「呈现在眼前」指那件事在他心中现起。「睁开眼睛看此世」是说睁开眼时,由于见到自己的儿女等而看到此世。「闭上眼睛看他世」是说闭眼时,由于趣相现前而见到他世。因此说到「四恶趣」等。第五句,即经由「身坏命终」等所言及的第五种过患部分。显示巴利原文
Tassāti dussīlassa. Samādāya pavattiṭṭhānanti uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya katakāraṇaṃ. Āpāthaṃ āgacchatīti taṃ manaso upaṭṭhāti. Ummīletvā idhalokanti ummīlanakāle attano puttadārādidassanavasena idha lokaṃ passati. Nimīletvā paralokanti nimīlanakāle gatinimittupaṭṭhānavasena paralokaṃ passati. Tenāha ‘‘cattāro apāyā’’tiādi. Pañcamapadanti ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’tiādinā vutto pañcamo ādīnavakoṭṭhāso.
关于持戒者功德的解释显示巴利原文
Sīlavantaānisaṃsavaṇṇanā
150 「以与所说相反的方式」是指,以与前面所说过患相反的方式来阐述。正如「不放逸者能够按时完成种种农作、贸易等事务」这类说法;而「值得赞赏的戒,因他有戒,故称持戒者」「戒具足」指以戒而具足、「具足圆满的戒」等,这些关于义理的说明,由于容易理解,所以未加论述。显示巴利原文
150.Vuttavipariyāyenāti vuttāya ādīnavakathāya vipariyāyena. ‘‘Appamatto taṃ taṃ kasivāṇijjādiṃ yathākālaṃ sampādetuṃ sakkotī’’tiādinā ‘‘pāsaṃsaṃ sīlamassa atthīti sīlavā. Sīlasampannoti sīlena samannāgato. Sampannasīlo’’ti evamādikaṃ pana atthavacanaṃ sukaranti anāmaṭṭhaṃ.
151 「超出巴利的」是指,未被收录进结集的法谈。「就在那里」即是在那住所之中。显示巴利原文
151.Pāḷimuttakāyāti saṅgītianāruḷhāya dhammikathāya. Tatthevāti āvasathāgāre eva.
以下是关于华氏城建造的解释。显示巴利原文
Pāṭaliputtanagaramāpanavaṇṇanā
152 “Issariyamattāya”意为“以自在的衡量标准”,也可解作以自在与财富的资具来衡量;因为在世间,种种受用的资具也被称为“mattā”(量)。“将巴吒厘村建为城市”,是说将过去名为“巴吒厘村”的地方,现在营造为一座城市。“建造”即建立、设置。“为阻断收入来源”,即为了截断收入的门径。另有版本读作“sahassasevā”,意指数以千计,因此解释说:“每一群都成百上千。”“房屋基地”,是指预备建造房屋的地点。“心倾向”,是说由于相应诸天的威神力,地师们的心在天神已经把持、圈定的那些所在自然趋近。“藉由技艺之力”,是指依随技艺而生起之知识的力量。“龙王把持”,指龙王对居住区域的占有把持,对其余两者的解说也可同理了知。“石头”,指带有不祥之兆的石头。“树桩”,指任何露出地面的树桩。他们宣说技艺之后,会避开那种容易引发忿怒的处所,而在没有引发忿怒之虞的地方,与把持地基的天神们进行一种默契似的沟通,通过给予显示巴利原文
152.Issariyamattāyāti issariyappamāṇena, issariyena ceva vittūpakaraṇena cāti evaṃ vā attho daṭṭhabbo. Upabhogūpakaraṇānipi hi loke ‘‘mattā’’ti vuccanti. Pāṭaligāmaṃ nagaraṃ katvāti pubbe ‘‘pāṭaligāmo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ ṭhānaṃ idāni nagaraṃ katvā. Māpentīti patiṭṭhāpenti. Āyamukhapacchindanatthanti āyadvārānaṃ upacchedanāya. ‘‘Sahassasevā’’ti vā pāṭho, sahassaso eva. Tenāha ‘‘ekekavaggavasena sahassaṃ sahassaṃ hutvā’’ti. Gharavatthūnīti gharapatiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni. Cittāni namantīti taṃtaṃdevatānubhāvena tattha tattheva cittāni namanti vatthuvijjāpāṭhakānaṃ, yattha yattha tāhi vatthūni pariggahitāni. Sippānubhāvenāti sippānugatavijjānubhāvena. Nāgaggāhoti nāgānaṃ nivāsappariggaho. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo. Pāsāṇoti appalakkhaṇapāsāṇo. Khāṇukoti yo koci khāṇuko . Sippaṃ jappitvā tādisaṃ sārambhaṭṭhānaṃ pariharitvā anārambhe ṭhāne tāhi vatthupariggāhikāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ mantayamānāviya taṃtaṃgehāni māpenti upadesadānavasena. Nesanti vatthuvijjāpāṭhakānaṃ, sabbāsaṃ devatānaṃ. Maṅgalaṃ vaḍḍhāpessantīti maṅgalaṃ brūhessanti. Paṇḍitadassanādīni hi uttamamaṅgalāni. Tenāha ‘‘atha maya’’ntiādi.
此处说“名声流传”,是因为可以用事物的部分特性来指代整体,正如说“打扮得体的提婆达多”,其实只是他身上装饰得体,却用“提婆达多”这个整体来表述。显示巴利原文
Saddo abbhuggacchati avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbato yathā ‘‘alaṅkato devadatto’’ti.
“对圣域之人”,是指居住在圣者国度的人们。“以成堆的方式”:如同说“一千、十万”等,即是依巨大的货堆规模进行买卖。因为少量货物的买卖在别处也能进行,所以这里特意强调“以成堆的方式”。商路,第一种解释是商队进行贸易活动所行的路径;第二种解释中,商路则指商人们的住处,为了表明这个意思,才说“商人的住处”。拆包之处,是商人们拆开、卸下货包的地方,故说“货物包……即是指此”。显示巴利原文
Ariyakamanussānanti ariyadesavāsimanussānaṃ. Rāsivasenevāti ‘‘sahassaṃ satasahassa’’ntiādinā rāsivaseneva, appakassa pana bhaṇḍassa kayavikkayo aññatthāpi labbhatevāti ‘‘rāsivasenevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vāṇijāya patho pavattiṭṭhānanti vaṇippathoti purimavikappe attho dutiyavikappe pana vāṇijānaṃ patho pavattiṭṭhānanti, vaṇippathoti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘vāṇijānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Bhaṇḍapuṭe bhindanti mocenti etthāti puṭabhedananti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘bhaṇḍapuṭe…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
此处的“ca”字,可表“和”的聚合义,亦可表“或者”的选择义。显示巴利原文
Ca-kārattho samuccayattho vā-saddo.
153 “黑耳有情”:因自身多行黑法,又成为他人感召黑报之缘,故得“黑耳”之名,指那些加害他人、自身福报威势微劣的众生。“他”指世尊。“于上午时分”:即于上午某时。“以入村的仪容”:即以将入村落时的齐整着装。“整理好随身之物”:即披好袈裟,持钵在手。显示巴利原文
153.Kāḷakaṇṇī sattāti attanā kaṇhadhammabahulatāya paresañca kaṇhavipākānatthanibbattinimittatāya ‘‘kāḷakaṇṇī’’ti laddhanāmā parūpaddavakarā appesakkhasattā. Tanti bhagavantaṃ. Pubbaṇhasamayanti pubbaṇhe ekaṃ samayaṃ. Gāmappavisananīhārenāti gāmappavesana nivasanākārena. Kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāti cīvaraṃ pārupitvā, pattaṃ hatthena gahetvāti attho.
“Ettha”谓“在此”,即于此处,或所分别的特定处所。“Saññate”谓“防护已具足”,即身、语、意完全正确地防护,善加收敛。显示巴利原文
Etthāti etasmiṃ vā sakappitappadese. Saññateti sammadeva saññate susaṃvutakāyavācācitte.
“应给予所得”(Pattiṃ dadeyya),意指将自己所修的功德转施给那些天神。在“被供养”(Pūjitā)等语中,这种施予即是供养;而为未来灾难安排守护,则是还敬(paṭipūjā)。亲属众人通常会以回向功德等方式,对亡故的亲属作供养、恭敬等事,而这些天神并非亲属,却也如此行持,因此应当恭敬地为他们安排守护——为了显示天神们在这样互相劝请之后,精勤地如此行持,故说“这些”(ime)等。为了显示作供奉是尊敬,消除现前已生的危难是酬敬,故说“这些”(ete)等。显示巴利原文
Pattiṃ dadeyyāti attanā pasutaṃ puññaṃ tāsaṃ devatānaṃ anuppadajjeyya. ‘‘Pūjitā’’tiādīsu tadeva pattidānaṃ pūjā, anāgate eva upaddave ārakkhasaṃvidhānaṃ paṭipūjā. ‘‘Yebhuyyena ñātimanussā ñātipetānaṃ pattidānādinā pūjanamānanādīni karonti ime pana aññātakāpi samānā tathā karonti, tasmā nesaṃ sakkaccaṃ ārakkhā saṃvidhātabbā’’ti aññamaññaṃ sampavāretvā devatā tattha ussukkaṃ āpajjantīti dassento ‘‘ime’’tiādimāha. Balikammakaraṇaṃ mānanaṃ, sampati uppannaparissayaharaṇaṃ paṭimānanti dassetuṃ ‘‘ete’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“他看见美妙的”(Sundarāni passati),意即他只看见美妙、可意的色,不看见不可意的色。显示巴利原文
Sundarāni passatīti sundarāni iṭṭhāni eva passati, na aniṭṭhāni.
154 “敲击木栓”(Āṇiyo koṭṭetvā)是指用轻木棒,如同钉门板一般,敲击木栓以使它们彼此连接。“不用船作成的筏”(Nāvāsaṅkhepena kataṃ uḷumpaṃ),指不是以船制成的筏,而是将竹、芦苇等材料捆扎成束,再用藤蔓等绑缚而成的筏。显示巴利原文
154.Āṇiyo koṭṭetvāti lahuke dārudaṇḍe gahetvā kavāṭaphalake viya aññamaññaṃ sambandhe kātuṃ āṇiyo koṭṭetvā. Nāvāsaṅkhepena kataṃ uḷumpaṃ, veḷunaḷādike saṅgharitvā valliādīhi kalāpavasena bandhitvā kattabbaṃ kullaṃ.
“这是对有水处的称呼”意思是,对任何前述有水之处,此“海洋”(aṇṇava)即是其称呼,意指大海(samudda)本身。这里的“流”(sara)指河流(nadī),因为它流动、奔流。“甚深且广”(Gambhīravitthata),甚深是因为不可测度,广是因为遍满三界。“不触”(Visajja),即不靠近、不抵达。“小池沼”(pallalāni),因为它们无法渡过。“无筏则不能渡”(Vināyeva kullena),是说这样的水域,若无这样的筏,便不能渡过;然而,智者已渡过。句义衔接是:智者以圣道为桥,渡过了渴爱之流。显示巴利原文
Udakaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacananti yathāvuttassa yassa kassaci udakaṭṭhānassa etaṃ ‘‘aṇṇava’’nti adhivacanaṃ, samuddassevāti adhippāyo. Saranti idha nadī adhippetā sarati sandatīti katvā. Gambhīravitthatanti agādhaṭṭhena gambhīraṃ, sakalalokattayabyāpitāya vitthataṃ. Visajjāti anāsajja appatvā. Pallalāni tesaṃ ataraṇato. Vināyeva kullenāti īdisaṃ udakaṃ kullena īdisena vinā eva tiṇṇā medhāvino janā, taṇhāsaraṃ pana ariyamaggasaṅkhātaṃ setuṃ katvā nittiṇṇāti yojanā.
圣谛说法注显示巴利原文
Ariyasaccakathāvaṇṇanā
155 “大莲华王”(Mahāpanādassa rañño)。“在宫殿尖顶处所建的村落”(Pāsādakoṭiyaṃkatagāmo),是指在宫殿的尖顶(patitathupikāya)所在之处建立的村落。“作圣性者”(ariyabhāvakarānaṃ),是就那些证悟者而言,依作者近因的表述,指称他们的现观之相。由于把“皮之颠倒”当作真实,对诸谛的认知是颠倒的。随觉是前分智,通达是道智的现观。在此,通达必须以前分的随觉为前提,没有随觉就没有通达;而且随觉的一部分也与通达相关。二者都缺失,才导致在轮回中流转,所以经文中说:“由于不随觉……乃至……汝等之”。取结生而有,从一有转移到另一有称为流转,接连不断地死与生称为轮转,因此说“从有”等。考虑到“流转”与“轮转”这两个词是以业为成就的,所以在第一种解释中说“我及汝等”。在第二种解释中,则以有的成就为核心,直接按字面说“我之及汝等之”。能牵引,就是能拉取,如同被长绳绑住的鸟,执绳的人把它拉往他处;以渴爱之绳绑住的有情相续,被行拉往另一有,所以称它显示巴利原文
155.Mahāpanādassa rañño. Pāsādakoṭiyaṃkatagāmoti pāsādassa patitathupikāya patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne niviṭṭhagāmo. Ariyabhāvakarānanti ye paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ ariyabhāvakarānaṃ nimittassa kattubhāvūpacāravaseneva vuttaṃ. Tacchāvipallāsabhūtabhāvena saccānaṃ. Anubodho pubbabhāgiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ, paṭivedho maggañāṇena abhisamayo, tattha yasmā anubodhapubbako paṭivedho anubodhena vinā na hoti, anubodhopi ekacco paṭivedhena sambandho, tadubhayābhāvahetukañca vaṭṭeva saṃsaraṇaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ananubodhā…pe… tumhākañcā’’ti. Paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena bhavato bhavantarūpagamanaṃ sandhāvanaṃ, aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanavasena sañcaraṇaṃ saṃsaraṇanti āha ‘‘bhavato’’tiādi. Sandhāvitasaṃsaritapadānaṃ kammasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mayā ca tumhehi cā’’ti paṭhamavikappe. Dutiyavikappe pana bhāvasādhanataṃ hadaye katvā ‘‘mamañceva tumhākañcā’’ti yathārutavaseneva vuttaṃ. Nayanasamatthāti pāpanasamatthā, dīgharajjunā baddhasakuṇaṃ viya rajjuhattho puriso desantaraṃ taṇhārajjunā baddhaṃ sattasantānaṃ abhisaṅkhāro bhavantaraṃ neti etāyāti bhavanetti, taṇhā, sā ariyamaggasatthena suṭṭhu hatā chinnāti bhavanettisamūhatā.
不还法、菩提道注显示巴利原文
Anāvattidhammasambodhiparāyaṇavaṇṇanā
156 有两个村庄,得名为“那提迦”(Nātikā)。这里是以 na 字母来指示 ña 字母,就像“无相者不被引导”(animittā na nāyare)等处的用法一样。因此说“在亲属村庄”(ñātigāmake)。“砖块”(giñjakā)就是指烧制的砖。纯粹用砖建造的住所,就称为“砖造住处”(giñjakāvasatho)。据说那座住所是这样建造的:完全不涉及任何石灰粉刷,只是用烧砖砌筑并覆盖而成。因此说“在以砖造的精舍”(iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe)。不过,梁、门闩、门扇等还是木制的。显示巴利原文
156.Dve gāmā ‘‘nātikā’’ti evaṃ laddhanāmo, ña-kārassa cāyaṃ na-kārādesena niddeso ‘‘animittā na nāyare’’tiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.174; jā. aṭṭha. 2.2.34) viya. Tenāha ‘‘ñātigāmake’’ti . Giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhi eva kato āvasathoti giñjakāvasatho. So kira āvāso yathā sudhāparikammena sampayojanaṃ natthi, evaṃ iṭṭhakāhi eva cinitvā chādetvā kato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe’’ti. Tulādaṇḍakavāṭaphalakāni pana dārumayāneva.
157 “下”(oraṃ)是指欲界(kāmadhātu)。这些结依缘而系属于那个“下”,故称“下分结”(orambhāgiyāni);或者,对下分有助益的,也称为下分结。因此说“下分的”(heṭṭhābhāgiyānaṃ)等。“通过三道”(tīhi maggehi)是指通过较低的三道。因为这些结须由那三道来断除,所以才被称为下分结。或者依据词源释法,应被断除的下分(orambhañjiyāni)也被说成下分结。现在为了通过遮去的方式来阐明这些结的下分性质,而说了“在那里”等。“被镇伏的”(vikkhambhitāni):因缘不具足,所以对凡夫而言是镇伏状态;“被断除的”(samucchinnāni):完全无有,所以对圣者而言已断除。这些结对于往生色界、无色界之有不再成为障碍,因为已经不存在。所以说了“未被镇伏、未被断除的”(avikkhambhitāni asamucchinnāni)。“以出生故”(nibbattavasenā):指以结生的执取而言。“不能去”(gant…显示巴利原文
157.Oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu, paccayabhāvena taṃ oraṃ bhajantīti orambhāgiyāni, orambhāgassa vā hitāni orambhāgiyāni. Tenāha ‘‘heṭṭhābhāgiyāna’’ntiādi. Tīhi maggehīti heṭṭhimehi tīhi maggehi. Tehi pahātabbatāya hi nesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ orambhāgiyatā. Orambhañjiyāni vā orambhāgiyāni vuttāni niruttinayena. Idāni byatirekamukhena nesaṃ orambhāgiyabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vikkhambhitāni samatthatāvighātena puthujjanānaṃ, samucchinnāni sabbaso abhāvena ariyānaṃ rūpārūpabhavūpapattiyā vibandhāya na hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘avikkhambhitāni asamucchinnānī’’ti. Nibbattavasenāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena. Gantuṃ na denti mahaggatagāmikammāyūhanassa vinibandhanato. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīni tīṇi saṃyojanāni kāmacchandabyāpādā viya mahaggatūpapattiyā avinibandhabhūtānipi kāmabhavūpapattiyā visesapaccayattā tattha mahaggatabhave nibbattampi tannibbattihetukammaparikkhaye kāmabhavūpapattipaccayatāya mahaggatabhavato ānetvā puna idheva kāmabhave eva nibbattāpenti, tasmā sabbānipi pañcapi saṃyojanāni orambhāgiyāni eva. Paṭisandhivasena anāgamanasabhāvāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena tasmā lokā idha na āgamanasabhāvā. Buddhadassanatheradassanadhammassavanānaṃ panatthāyassa āgamanaṃ anivāritaṃ.
“有时”(kadāci karahaci)生起,即具有稀有性;由于缠缚的微弱而不粗重,这两方面的情况即是“微薄”(tanubhāvo)。“频繁”(abhiṇhaṃ)指多次。“粗重又粗重”(bahalabahalā)指极其强烈。它们生起时,会压制、遍满、征服那个相续,并在其中作黑暗;但由于已由两道断除,它们便以极其微薄、极其微弱的状态生起。“有子女”这并非理由,实际上仅以触摸肢体等也能成为[子女]。这里所说的“这是贪嗔痴的微薄”(rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā)一语,是就“有之微薄”(bhavatanuka)而言,也就是以稀有的方式。“那个”(taṃ)指驳斥了大西瓦长老的说法,这是文句的连接。对于圣者们可获得的那些有,必定是具足圆满相的有;如果不可得,那又怎能称为有之微薄呢?因此,为了显示在两种情况下都不存在有之微薄,而说了“对入流者”等。在第八有中,并不存在有之微薄,因为第八有本身完全不存在。其余的情况,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Kadāci karahaci uppattiyā saviraḷākāratā pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya abahalatāti dvedhāpi tanubhāvo. Abhiṇhanti bahuso. Bahalabahalāti tibbatibbā. Yattha uppajjanti, taṃ santānaṃ maddantā, pharantā, sādhentā, andhakāraṃ karontā uppajjanti, dvīhi pana maggehi pahīnattā tanukatanukā mandamandā uppajjanti. ‘‘Puttadhītaro hontī’’ti idaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Tathā hi aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanamattenapi te honti. Idanti ‘‘rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhavatanukavasenāti appakabhavavasena. Tanti mahāsivattherassa vacanaṃ paṭikkhittanti sambandho. Ye bhavā ariyānaṃ labbhanti, te paripuṇṇalakkhaṇabhavā eva. Ye na labbhanti, tattha kīdisaṃ taṃ bhavatanukaṃ, tasmā ubhayathāpi bhavatanukassa asambhavo evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sotāpannassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhame bhave bhavatanukaṃ natthi aṭṭhamasseva bhavassa sabbasseva abhāvato. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
这是针对欲界世间而说的,因为无法以其他世间的情形来那样表述。因为一来者无论在天、人二界中如何混合转生,也都只能以欲有来限定。而且世尊立足于欲界,才说“仅一次回到此世间”;而“回到此世间”这句话,是排除了五种一来者中的四种之后,唯取其中一种。因为有些人在此世间证得一来果后,就在此世间般涅槃;有些在此证果后,于天界般涅槃;有些在天界证果后,即于天界般涅槃;有些在天界证果后,再生于此世间而般涅槃——这四种都不在此处所说的范围之内。唯有一种:在此世间证得一来果后,于天界住至寿尽,再来到此世间受生并般涅槃的,才是此处所指。在注疏中,为了阐明“此世间”意指欲有,而以“假如……”等显示了另一种四分类。显示巴利原文
Kāmāvacaralokaṃsandhāya vuttaṃ itarassa lokassa vasena tathā vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Yo hi sakadāgāmī devamanussalokesu vomissakavasena nibbattati, sopi kāmabhavavaseneva paricchinditabbo. Bhagavatā ca kāmaloke ṭhatvā ‘‘sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā’’ti ca iminā pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu cattāro vajjetvā ekova gahito. Ekacco hi idha sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patvā idheva parinibbāyati, ekacco idha patvā devaloke parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati, ime cattāro idha na labbhanti. Yo pana idha patvā devaloke yāvatāyukaṃ vasitvā puna idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ idha adhippeto. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana imaṃ lokanti kāmabhavo adhippetoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sace hī’’tiādinā aññaṃyeva catukkaṃ dassitaṃ.
于四……之中,“自性”的意思是:由于他已完全断除能令人堕入恶趣的恶法。“以法决定”:以道法的决定性。“决定”:因为必定会证得更高之道,因此说“以正觉为归宿”。显示巴利原文
Catūsu…pe… sabhāvoti attho apāyagamanīyānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ sabbaso pahīnattā. Dhammaniyāmenāti maggadhammaniyāmena. Niyato uparimaggādhigamassa avassaṃbhāvibhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘sambodhiparāyaṇo’’ti.
法镜法门的解释显示巴利原文
Dhammādāsadhammapariyāyavaṇṇanā
158 “各各之智行”:对于各类众生,“某人是入流者,某人是斯陀含”等,如此证得各别之智。“智之生起”与“智之未来”:指此后,“决定以正觉为归宿,仅一次返回此世间后即作苦之边际”等,伴随智慧的生起因缘状态。当以智眼观察时,只不过身体会有疲倦,并非就能对那些应受调伏的有情成就什么利益——这才是意趣所在。“心苦”即心的疲累,因其伴随烦恼,故佛陀们没有。能取、能照见自己,故名为“镜”;成为法的镜,即“法镜”,这是对圣道智的称呼。圣弟子凭借此法镜,因在四圣谛中已摧毁迷乱,如实了知自己后,便能如实记说;不过,由于这部开显此法门的经,才应知有法镜性。“以此法镜”:此处特指道法。显示巴利原文
158.Tesaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇagatinti tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ ‘‘asuko sotāpanno, asuko sakadāgāmī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃñāṇādhigamanaṃ. Ñāṇūpapattiṃ ñāṇābhisamparāyanti tato parampi ‘‘niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo, sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karissatī’’tiādinā ca ñāṇasahitaṃ uppattipaccayabhāvaṃ. Olokentassa ñāṇacakkhunā pekkhantassa kāyakilamathova, na tena kāci veneyyānaṃ atthasiddhīti adhippāyo. Cittavihesāti cittakhedo, sā kilesūpasaṃhitattā buddhānaṃ natthi. Ādīyati ālokīyati attā etenāti ādāsaṃ, dhammabhūtaṃ ādāsaṃ dhammādāsaṃ, ariyamaggañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tena ariyasāvakā catūsu ariyasaccesu viddhastasammohattā attānampi yāthāvato ñatvā yāthāvato byākareyya, tappakāsanato pana dhammapariyāyassa suttassa dhammādāsatā veditabbā. Yena dhammādāsenāti idha pana maggadhammameva vadati.
“证净”:彻底如实知后,由彼相所生的净信,即由证得道而生起的净信。然而,此净信犹如岩石山一般不动,不因任何原因而退失,故说为“不动、不退的”。显示巴利原文
Avecca yāthāvato jānitvā tannimittauppannapasādo aveccapasādo, maggādhigamena uppannapasādo , so pana yasmā pāsāṇapabbato viya niccalo, na ca kenaci kāraṇena vigacchati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘acalena accutenā’’ti.
“五戒”:这是针对在家者而说,因为他们决定要持守。然而对圣者们来说,一切戒都是可意的。因此说:“但在此处,一切防护也都能获得。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcasīlānī’’ti gahaṭṭhavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ tehi ekantapariharaṇīyato. Ariyānaṃ pana sabbāni sīlāni kantāneva. Tenāha ‘‘sabbopi panettha saṃvaro labbhatiyevā’’ti.
“一切”:指一切圣者。“不与学处相违”:意思是如同不违犯说实语戒那样,不违犯学处。“在合适的地方”:指适宜行事的场合。显示巴利原文
Sabbesanti sabbesaṃ ariyānaṃ. Sikkhāpadāvirodhenāti yathā bhūtarocanāpatti na hoti, evaṃ. Yuttaṭṭhāneti kātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne.
庵婆婆利妓女事的解释显示巴利原文
Ambapālīgaṇikāvatthuvaṇṇanā
161 据说那时毗舍离繁荣富庶,具足一切圆满,臻至极盛,因此说:“应依《犍度》中所说之法,了知毗舍离的成就。”据说彼比丘僧团中,约有五百位比丘是新近出家,且已退失精进者。正如后面将要说:“据说彼处有些比丘退失精进”等。为令正念现前:也就是为了让他们建立正念。“能忆念”:即依身等,如实以与智相应之念而随念、确知。“能正知”:即以种种方式平等地了知、觉了。此为略说,广说见于后《念处注》中。显示巴利原文
161. Tadā kira vesālī iddhā phītā sabbaṅgasampannā ahosi vepullappattā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘khandhake vuttanayena vesāliyā sampannabhāvo veditabbo’’ti. Tasmiṃ kira bhikkhusaṅghe pañcasatamattā bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā ahesuṃ osannavīriyā ca. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘tattha kira ekacce bhikkhū osannavīriyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.165). Satipaccupaṭṭhānatthanti tesaṃ satipaccupaṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Saratīti kāyādike yathāsabhāvato ñāṇasampayuttāya satiyā anussarati upadhāreti. Sampajānātīti samaṃ pakārehi jānāti avabujjhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana parato satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106) āgamissati.
「总摄一切」:这是总括一切青色相的词语,包括身体的和衣饰的。「正是那个」:指“青色”即是依总摄一切义而说。「显示分别」:即显示差别。正如那些离车族王众,有些人本非黄色等色,因涂香而显现黄色等色;同样,有些人本非青色等色,因涂香而显现青色等色,所以文中说“并非他们的本色是青色”等。「有青色宝珠在其中」:即青色宝珠,指镶嵌着因陀罗青、大青等青色宝石的装饰品。据说那些装饰品由黄金制成,因宝石光芒而看来一片青色。「嵌有青色宝珠」:即被青色宝石所围绕。「被青色衣围绕」:即被青衣、青色颤动物所围绕。「以青色铠甲」:指被青色铠甲所围绕。于一切处:即在“成为黄色”等一切地方。「转动」:即碰撞。「带来」:从此处国王的臣子们征集力量,名为“食物”,到达该地方,因此说“连同所食,即连同地方”。「弹指」:也是仅仅以手指摇动而产生,故说“摇动手指”。“女人”:指妇女。这是对女人的委婉称呼,即“女人,妇女,生育者”。显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅgāhakanti sarīragatassa ceva vatthālaṅkāragatassa cāti sabbassa nīlabhāvassa saṅgāhakaṃ vacanaṃ. Tassevāti nīlāti sabbasaṅgāhakavasena vuttaatthasseva. Vibhāgadassananti pabhedadassanaṃ. Yathā te licchavirājāno apītādivaṇṇā eva keci vilepanavasena pītādivaṇṇā khāyiṃsu, evaṃ anīlādivaṇṇā eva keci vilepanavasena nīlādivaṇṇā khāyiṃsūti vuttaṃ ‘‘na tesaṃ pakativaṇṇo nīlo’’tiādi. Nīlo maṇi etesūti nīlamaṇi, indanīlamahānīlādinīlaratanavinaddhā alaṅkārā. Te kira suvaṇṇaviracite hi maṇiobhāsehi ekanīlā viya khāyanti. Nīlamaṇikhacitāti nīlaratanaparikkhittā. Nīlavatthaparikkhittāti nīlavatthanīlakampalaparikkhepā. Nīlavammikehīti nīlakaghaṭaparikkhittehi. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘pītā hontī’’tiādisabbapadesu. Parivaṭṭesīti paṭighaṭṭesi. Āharanti imasmā rājapurisā balinti āhāro, tappattajanapadoti āha ‘‘sāhāranti sajanapada’’nti. Aṅguliphoṭopi aṅguliyā cālanavaseneva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aṅguliṃ cālesu’’nti. Ambakāyāti mātugāmena. Upacāravacanaṃ hetaṃ itthīsu, yadidaṃ ‘‘ambakā mātugāmo jananikā’’ti.
「观看」:指不转开而观看,你们这样观看。那不转开的观看就是一再地看,所以文中说“反复地看”。「引近」:就是“如同这离车族王众具有超群的光辉,三十三天众也是如此”,你们应这样来做类比。因此说“使与三十三天等同后再看”。显示巴利原文
Avalokethāti apavattitvā olokanaṃ oloketha. Taṃ pana apavattitvā olokanaṃ anu anu dassanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ passathā’’ti. Upanethāti ‘‘yathāyaṃ licchavirājaparisā sobhātisayena yuttā, evaṃ tāvatiṃsaparisā’’ti upanayaṃ karotha. Tenāha ‘‘tāvatiṃsehi samake katvā passathā’’ti.
“比丘们,把离车族众比拟为三十三天众”:这并非教导执取相,只应如此看待:这些国王的自在成就,如同天界成就,恰如在次第说法中讲述天界成就一般。然而,在那些比丘中,有些人可能会执取相,所以特意说“让执取相”。这是出于利益的心意,为了那些比丘,如同为了具寿难陀的利益而显示天界成就那样。因此说“据说在那里”等。「精进退减」:指在正确修行上精进减弱,或者说舍弃了精进。「为阐明无常相」:即借那些国王的事例,向比丘们显明无常相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Upasaṃharatha bhikkhave licchaviparisaṃ tāvatiṃsasadisa’’nti nayidaṃ nimittaggāhe niyojanaṃ, kevalaṃ pana dibbasampattisadisā etesaṃ rājūnaṃ issariyasampattīti anupubbikathāya saggasampattikathanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesu pana bhikkhūsu ekaccānaṃ tattha nimittaggāhopi siyā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nimittaggāhe uyyojetī’’ti. Hitakāmatāya tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yathā āyasmato nandassa hitakāmatāya saggasampattidassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tatra kirā’’tiādi. Osannavīriyāti sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ avasannavīriyā, ossaṭṭhavīriyā vāti attho. Aniccalakkhaṇavibhāvanatthanti tesaṃ rājūnaṃ vasena bhikkhūnaṃ aniccalakkhaṇavibhūtabhāvatthaṃ.
进入竹林村雨安居的注释显示巴利原文
Veḷuvagāmavassūpagamanavaṇṇanā
163 「竹林村附近」:是指上午或傍晚能够前往并返回的邻近区域,那里建有附属村落。「聚集」:即正确前往。「于他」:指世尊。显示巴利原文
163.Samīpe veḷuvagāmoti pubbaṇhaṃ vā sāyanhaṃ vā gantvā nivattanayogye āsannaṭṭhāne niviṭṭhā parivāragāmo. Saṅgammāti sammā gantvā. Assāti bhagavato.
164 「粗重」:指粗糙、沉重。「不调和病」:即因界不调和而生起的严重疾病,并非一般小病。「以智决断」:指以智慧如实决断、衡量感受的刹那性、苦性与无我性。「忍受」:即战胜那些感受,以善加压制的行相将其承担于自身而安住,而不是被它们战胜。因此世尊说「无恼害」等。「无苦」:不是指心中无苦,而是不能说身苦不存在;若无身苦,忍受便不可能。「不告知」:即不通知、不告诉。「不征询」:即不征求意见,也就是不解散,这表示未给予教诫。「以预备道精进」:即以果等至的近行精进。「以果等至精进」:即以与果等至相应的精进。「已镇伏」:即已经去除。如同瞻波树等正在开花时,若在树干上刻下划痕,只要划痕未消除,其开花能力便被压制消失;同样,以此精进之“刻痕”施加,那些感受在导师体内,于预定时间内就被镇伏消除。因此说「镇伏即去除」。「乃至命」:命行由业所造作,当它被违害的缘结合而将要切断时,通过精进成就的努力显示巴利原文
164.Pharusoti kakkhaḷo, garutaroti attho. Visabhāgarogoti dhātuvisabhāgatāya samuṭṭhito bahalatararogo, na ābādhamattaṃ. Ñāṇena paricchinditvāti vedanānaṃ khaṇikataṃ, dukkhataṃ, attasuññatañca yāthāvato ñāṇena paricchijja parituletvā. Adhivāsesīti tā abhibhavanto yathāparimadditākārasallakkhaṇena attani āropetvā vāsesi, na tāhi abhibhuyyamāno. Tenāha ‘‘avihaññamāno’’tiādi. Adukkhiyamānoti cetodukkhavasena adukkhiyamāno , kāyadukkhaṃ pana ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Asati hi tasmiṃ adhivāsanāya eva asambhavoti. Anāmantetvāti anālapitvā. Anapaloketvāti avissajjitvā. Tenāha ‘‘ovādānusāsaniṃ adatvāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Pubbabhāgavīriyenāti phalasamāpattiyā parikammavīriyena. Phalasamāpattivīriyenāti phalasamāpattisampayuttavīriyena. Vikkhambhetvāti vinodetvā. Yathā nāma pupphanasamaye campakādirukkhe vekhe dinne yāva so vekho nāpanīyati, tāvassa pupphanasamatthatā vikkhambhitā vinoditā hoti, evameva yathāvuttavīriyavekhadānena tā vedanā satthu sarīre yathāparicchinnaṃ kālaṃ vikkhambhitā vinoditā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhetvāti vinodetvā’’ti. Jīvitampi jīvitasaṅkhāro kammunā saṅkharīyatīti katvā. Chijjamānaṃ virodhipaccayasamāyogena payogasampattiyā ghaṭetvā ṭhapīyati. Adhiṭṭhāyāti adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘dasamāse mā uppajjitthāti samāpattiṃ samāpajjī’’ti. Taṃ pana ‘‘adhiṭṭhānaṃ, pavattana’’nti ca vattabbataṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā pavattetvā’’ti.
「刹那等至」:是指没有事先作那种准备行,而在某个位置就能进入的等至。因为没有作殊胜的准备行,所以感受又会再次遍布全身。关于色七法和无色七法,应该按照《清净道论注释》中详细说明的方式来理解。「善加镇伏」:由于准备行的殊胜。现在为了用比喻阐明这个意思,便说「譬如」等。「已移除」:就是已经除去。用十四种行相善加混合:就是依那些色七法和无色七法,用十四种方式,将观心,或者是将整个有身,由于不调和病所带来的干涩、无病而滋润之后,就不再产生,因为正自觉者以极其殊胜的等至力量善加镇伏了它们。显示巴利原文
Khaṇikasamāpattīti tādisaṃ pubbābhisaṅkhāraṃ akatvā ṭhānaso samāpajjitabbasamāpatti. Puna sarīraṃ vedanā ajjhottharati savisesapubbābhisaṅkhārassa akatattā. Rūpasattakaarūpasattakāni visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.706, 717) vitthāritanayena veditabbāni. Suṭṭhu vikkhambheti pubbābhisaṅkhārassa sātisayattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apabyūḷhoti apanīto. Cuddasahākārehi sannetvāti tesaṃyeva rūpasattakaarūpasattakānaṃ vasena cuddasahi pakārehi vipassanācittaṃ, sakalameva vā attabhāvaṃ visabhāgarogasañjanitalūkhabhāvanirogakaraṇāya sinehetvā na uppajjiyeva sammāsambuddhena sātisayasamāpattivegena suvikkhambhitattā.
「曾患病而后痊愈」:指先前害病,后来从那种病态中康复。「甘甜之性」:是指身体的僵硬状态,而僵硬又以沉重感为前提,故说为「产生沉重性、产生僵硬性」。「以种种方式不再现起」:这表示由于悲伤的力量,我甚至也失去了方向感。念处等法,即身随观等随观法,过去曾清晰地现前,如今于我已不再明了。显示巴利原文
Gilāno hutvā puna vuṭṭhitoti pubbe gilāno hutvā puna tato gilānabhāvato vuṭṭhito. Madhurakabhāvo nāma sarīrassa thambhitattaṃ, taṃ pana garubhāvapubbakanti āha ‘‘sañjātagarubhāvo sañjātathaddhabhāvo’’ti. ‘‘Nānākārato na upaṭṭhahantī’’ti iminā disāsammohopi me ahosi sokabalenāti dasseti. Satipaṭṭhānādidhammāti kāyānupassanādayo anupassanādhammā pubbe vibhūtā hutvā upaṭṭhahantāpi idāni mayhaṃ pākaṭā na honti.
165 「作内部」:指将事物只保留在自己内部。「令人作内部」:指先前以平等性之法摄受那人。「在年轻的时候」:指在自己年轻之时。「不告诉任何人」:指不向自己的任何弟子讲述那个已成秘密的教本。「作握拳」:犹如握拳在手,使其成为秘密。或者说,若那事物失坏,所有依它为根的法便会灭去;最初的根本法一旦失坏,法即灭坏、消失,因此称为「握拳」,以此显示并没有像这样握拳般藏匿于某处的事物。显示巴利原文
165.Abbhantaraṃ karoti nāma attaniyeva ṭhapanato. Puggalaṃ abbhantaraṃ karoti nāma samānattatāvasena dhammena pubbe tassa saṅgaṇhato. Daharakāleti attano daharakāle. Kassaci akathetvāti kassaci attano antevāsikassa upanigūhabhūtaṃ ganthaṃ akathetvā. Muṭṭhiṃ katvāti muṭṭhigataṃ viya rahasibhūtaṃ katvā. Yasmiṃ vā naṭṭhe sabbo taṃmūlako dhammo vinassati, so ādito mūlabhūto dhammo, mussati vinassati dhammo etena naṭṭhenāti muṭṭhi, taṃ tathārūpaṃ muṭṭhiṃ katvā pariharitvā ṭhapitaṃ kiñci natthīti dasseti.
「唯我」这一限定词,是为了显示护持比丘僧团并非他人与共;然而,若无此限定词,诸如“我护持比丘僧团”等语,则应视为显示在护持比丘僧团时没有我执及我所执。「以应称呼之义」:即“导师”一词,乃以应被称呼之义而说;其意为“比丘们不应承担”,另有异读作“Mā vā ahosī”。如此,当这种心态不生起时,便不会有“我将护持比丘僧团”等行相的心理活动。而说「已达最后身」等,是为了显示已达最后身,同时也说明佛陀的事业已如其寿命那般圆满终结。为使车轴外侧牢固而作的缠缚,称为「轴缚」;为使轮辋和毂孔牢固而作的缠缚,称为「轮缚」。显示巴利原文
Ahamevāti avadhāraṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghapariharaṇassa aññasādhāraṇicchādassanatthaṃ, avadhāraṇena pana vinā ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhusaṅgha’’ntiādi bhikkhusaṅghapariharaṇe ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uddisitabbaṭṭhenāti ‘‘satthā’’ti uddisitabbaṭṭhena. Mā vāahesuṃ bhikkhūti adhippāyo. ‘‘Mā vā ahosī’’ti vā pāṭho. Evaṃ na hotīti ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’tiādi ākārena cittappavatti na hoti. ‘‘Pacchimavayaanuppattabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vutta’’nti iminā vayo viya buddhakiccampi pariyositakammanti dīpeti. Sakaṭassa bāhappadese daḷhībhāvāya veṭhadānaṃ bāhabandho. Cakkanemisandhīnaṃ daḷhībhāvāya veṭhadānaṃ cakkabandho.
「其义」:是指与缠缚交织而思惟的已说之义。「色等诸法」:由于现起时似有形体,故有色相等相,即指色相等诸相。「世间受」:指通过灭除它们而可入果等至的那些受;这些受灭尽时,即得安乐,即便对于被剧苦所逼迫的身体亦是如此。「为此目的」:即为了安住果等至。所谓「洲」:本指四周被水浸淹、洪流围困而不遭淹没的陆地;此处以不被四种瀑流或轮回大瀑流淹没的自身为洲,故说「已至大海」等。「以自为皈依」:即依靠自己;「以自为归趣」:即以自己为归宿。不要再寻求其他归趣,也就是不应再寻求任何其他的趣向、依怙与归宿。何以故?因为从胜义上说,「自我」即是内在的法,此法若能如此成就,就是你们的洲、救护、归趣与归宿,因此说「以法为洲」等。正如经中所说:“自己正是自己的主人,他人怎能做主人?”(《法句》160,380)他人所给的只是教导,一切成就终究取决于人自己。因此世尊说:“你们应当自己精进,如来只是教导者。”(《法句》276)「他们最上」:是指安住于这种修行顶点的他们,因为已显示巴利原文
Tamatthanti veṭhamissakena maññeti vuttamatthaṃ. Rūpādayo eva dhammā saviggaho viya upaṭṭhānato rūpanimittādayo, tesaṃ rūpanimittādīnaṃ. Lokiyānaṃ vedanānanti yāsaṃ nirodhanena phalasamāpatti samāpajjitabbā, tāsaṃ nirodhā phāsu hoti, tathā bāḷhavedanābhitunnasarīrassāpi. Tadatthāyāti phalasamāpattivihāratthāya. Dvīhi bhāgehi āpo gato etthāti dīpo, oghena parigato hutvā anajjhotthaṭo bhūmibhāgo, idha pana catūhipi oghehi, saṃsāramahogheneva vā anajjhotthaṭo attā ‘‘dīpo’’ti adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘mahāsamuddagatā’’tiādi. Attassaraṇāti attappaṭisaraṇā. Attagatikā vāti attaparāyaṇāva . Mā aññagatikāti aññaṃ kiñci gatiṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ mā cintayittha. Kasmā? Attā nāmettha paramatthato dhammo abbhantaraṭṭhena, so evaṃ sampādito tumhākaṃ dīpaṃ tāṇaṃ gati parāyaṇanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammadīpā’’tiādi. Tathā cāha ‘‘attā hi attano nātho, ko hi nātho paro siyā’’ti (dha. pa. 160, 380) upadesamattameva hi parasmiṃ paṭibaddhaṃ, aññā sabbā sampatti purisassa attādhīnā eva. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘tumhehi kiccaṃ ātappaṃ, akkhātāro tathāgatā’’ti (dha. pa. 276). Tamaggeti tamayogassa agge tassa atikkantābhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘ime aggatamā’’tiādi. Mamāti mama sāsane. Sabbepi te catusatipaṭṭhānagocarā vāti catubbidhaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā tadeva gocaraṃ attano pavattiṭṭhānaṃ katvā ṭhitā eva bhikkhū agge bhavissanti.
相与光明论的注释显示巴利原文
Nimittobhāsakathāvaṇṇanā
166 166. 世尊曾多次住于毗舍离,因此为准确显示此次进入毗舍离的情形,先问:“是何时进入的?”然后从他到来之时开始说明,故说“据说世尊……”等语。「沿着来时的路回去」:即沿着他先前直至竹竿村所走的那条原路返回。「按照已界定的时间」:即按照已精确划分的时间,从彼果等至中出定。「此」:即指现在要说的这种方式。观察昼间休息处等,是为了显示般涅槃已成必然。「已弃舍」:即已舍去寿行,心怀“我今唯再住世七日”。显示巴利原文
166. Anekavāraṃ bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharati, tasmā imaṃ vesālippavesanaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kadā pāvisī’’ti pucchitvā āgamanato paṭṭhāya taṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādimāha. Āgatamaggenevāti pubbe yāva veḷuvagāmakā āgatamaggeneva paṭinivattento. Yathāparicchedenāti yathāparicchinnakālena. Tatoti phalasamāpattito. Ayanti idāni vuccamānākāro. Divāṭṭhānolokanādi parinibbānassa ekantikabhāvadassanaṃ. Ossaṭṭhoti vissaṭṭho āyusaṅkhāro ‘‘sattāhameva mayā jīvitabba’’nti.
「兄弟中或长或幼」:此是通指一切同梵行者而说。显示巴利原文
Jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhātikānanti sabbeva sabrahmacārino sandhāya vadati.
“我将使之行道”:即我将策励、引导他走上修行之道。“摩尼板”:指镶嵌摩尼宝珠的、位于前端的受用板。“那初次见面”:指他以游方者形象来到竹林精舍时所实现的会面,这是初次见面;或者,也可以指在发愿时,因深信无量见佛世尊之言,当时如同亲见一般实现的与你们的相会,这也算是初次见面。“归程游行”:即为返回而进行的游方。显示巴利原文
Paṭipādessāmīti maggapaṭipattiyā niyojessāmi. Maṇiphalaketi maṇikhacite pamukhe atthataphalake. Taṃ paṭhamaṃdassananti yaṃ veḷuvane paribbājakarūpena āgatassa siddhaṃ dassanaṃ, taṃ paṭhamadassanaṃ. Yaṃ vā anomadassissa bhagavato vacanaṃ saddahantena tadā abhinīhārakāle paccakkhato viya tumhākaṃ dassanaṃ siddhaṃ, taṃ paṭhamadassanaṃ. Paccāgamanacārikanti paccāgamanatthaṃ cārikaṃ.
“七日”:此为表示紧密结合关系的宾格用法。据说,那位长者的诞生室,较之其他房间更为僻静,且有一个露天的庭院,因此很适合诸天与梵天前来亲近,所以他才说:“请把诞生室准备好。”“此句”:指下文所述。“彼事”:指他因希望住在那里而说的事情。显示巴利原文
Sattāhanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Therassa jātovarakagehaṃ kira itaragehato vivekaṭṭhaṃ, vivaṭaṅgaṇañca, tasmā devabrahmānaṃ upasaṅkamanayogyanti ‘‘jātovarakaṃ paṭijaggathā’’ti vuttaṃ. Soti uparevato. Taṃ pavattinti tattha vasitukāmatāya vuttaṃ taṃ.
这位长老遵循“如来虽知,亦会发问”的原则,问道:“你们是谁?”当被问到“你比四大王更伟大”时,他将自己的伟大归功于导师,说道:“优婆夷们,这些人就像园丁,是我们导师的侍者。”因为赞叹声闻弟子的成就,实质上正是在彰显导师的成就。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti (pārā. 16, 165) iminā nīhārena thero ‘‘ke tumhe’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Tvaṃ catūhi mahārājehi mahantataro’’ti puṭṭho attano mahattaṃ satthu upari pakkhipanto ‘‘ārāmikasadisā ete upāsike amhākaṃ satthuno’’ti āha. Sāvakasampattikittanampi hi atthato satthu sampattiṃyeva vibhāveti.
「住立于入流果」:由于长老说法的威力,以及她自身资粮具足、智慧成熟,因而安住于入流果。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāyāti therassa desanānubhāvena, attano ca upanissayasampattiyā ñāṇassa paripakkattā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahitvā.
「这些」:即如前所说的那些。「在此」:指“进入毗舍离乞食”这句中所说的进入毗舍离之时。「次第论」:即次第开示的说法。显示巴利原文
Ayanti yathāvuttā. Etthāti ‘‘vesāliṃ piṇḍāya pāvisī’’ti etasmiṃ vesālīpavese. Anupubbīkathāti anupubbadīpanī kathā.
167 167.「在乌德那夜叉的支提处」:指以一位名叫乌德那的夜叉的居处为由,用砖砌成、被大众恭敬尊崇之处。「所作住处」:指为世尊而建造的住处。「被称为」:依先前的称呼而被称为「乌德那支提」。在「乔达摩支提」等中也是如此。「此即同一理趣」:即类推说明在支提处建造住处的情形。「已增长」:由修习圆满而得长养。「屡屡修作」:由修习的反复修集,而一再地令其现起。「如调适之车般修作」:犹如被熟练驭者驾驭的良马之车,能随其心意运行;同样地,它也被带到能随心所欲运行而无障碍的状态。「以住立之义」:即以决意之义。「如基址般修作」:由于完全清除了杂染,作为神足境界的现起处,就像已经完全清除了障碍的基址一样被修作。「已决意」:由于对立的障碍已被远离,以善修习的状态,安立于能一一决意的堪任性中。「周遍积集」:在一切方面都达到了修习的累积。因此说「善增长」。「善精勤」:为了神足修习而达到顶点,完全正确地反复修习。显示巴利原文
167.Udenayakkhassa cetiyaṭṭhāneti udenassa nāma yakkhassa āyatanabhāvena iṭṭhakāhi cite mahājanassa cittīkataṭṭhāne. Katavihāroti bhagavantaṃ uddissa katavihāro. Vuccatīti purimavohārena ‘‘udenacetiya’’nti vuccati. Gotamakādīsupīti ‘‘gotamakacetiya’’nti evaṃ ādīsupi. Eseva nayoti cetiyaṭṭhāne katavihārabhāvaṃ atidisati. Vaḍḍhitāti bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paribrūhitā. Punappunaṃ katāti bhāvanāya bahulīkaraṇena aparāparaṃ pavattitā. Yuttayānaṃ viya katāti yathā yuttaṃ ājaññayānaṃ chekena sārathinā adhiṭṭhitaṃ yathāruci pavattati, evaṃ yathārucipavattirahataṃ gamitā. Patiṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Vatthu viya katāti sabbaso upakkilesavisodhanena iddhivisayatāya pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato suvisodhitaparissayavatthu viya katā. Adhiṭṭhitāti paṭipakkhadūrībhāvato subhāvitabhāvena taṃtaṃadhiṭṭhānayogyatāya ṭhapitā . Samantato citāti sabbabhāgena bhāvanupacayaṃ gamitā. Tenāha ‘‘suvaḍḍhitā’’ti. Suṭṭhu samāraddhāti iddhibhāvanāya sikhāppattiyā sammadeva saṃsevitā.
“以不定”:即通过“无论任何人”这一不定的措辞。“决定后”:即通过显示“如来的”这一具体特征而予以决定。“寿量”:是指极限寿量。取此寿量的缘由,应依照《梵网经注释》中所述的方法来理解。然而,摩诃西瓦长老却说:“若将‘能令最后有菩萨结生的业,本具产生不可数寿量的能力’这事放在心上,而诸佛的寿行能克服障碍的能力,是于圣典中传下来的。若如此,世尊仅住于此贤劫便可以了吗?”他作了这样的表示。“为衰损等所征服”:依此,在义理上便能自然地达成结论:正如不能以神足力抗拒衰老,同样也不能以此抗拒死亡。“箭射何处,即落何处”:即使有不同见解出现,也仅应视为符合长老主张的注释言辞。因此他说:“他不欢喜……决定”。显示巴利原文
Aniyamenāti ‘‘yassa kassacī’’ti aniyamavacanena. Niyametvāti ‘‘tathāgatassā’’ti sarūpadassanena niyametvā. Āyuppamāṇanti paramāyuppamāṇaṃ vadati, tasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.40; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.40) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Mahāsivatthero pana ‘‘mahābodhisattānaṃ carimabhave paṭisandhidāyino kammassa asaṅkhyeyyāyukatāsaṃvattanasamatthataṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā buddhānaṃ āyusaṅkhārassa parissayavikkhambhanasamatthatā pāḷiyaṃ āgatā evāti imaṃ bhaddakappameva tiṭṭheyyā’’ti avoca. ‘‘Khaṇḍiccādīhi abhibhuyyatī’’ti etena yathā iddhibalena jarāya na paṭighāto, evaṃ tena maraṇassapi na paṭighātoti atthato āpannamevāti. ‘‘Kva saro khitto, kva ca nipatito’’ti aññathā vuṭṭhitenāpi theravādena aṭṭhakathāvacanameva samatthitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘so na ruccati…pe… niyamita’’nti.
「心被缠缚」(Pariyuṭṭhitacittoti):就像完全无法辨别任何义利与非义利那样,心被征服了。而这种征服,犹如大水洪流淹没了小水一般,因此说「心被淹没」(ajjhotthaṭacitto)。「其他人」(Aññopīti):指长老,或者圣者之外的任何一个凡夫。这里举凡夫为例,是为了显示:就像一切颠倒完全未断的凡夫,心被魔缠缚后,完全无法辨别任何义利一样,长老也完全没能辨识世尊所给出的相与光。为了显示这个意义,因此说「是魔啊」(māro hī)等语。「四种颠倒」(Cattāro vipallāsāti):于不净作「净」想——这是想颠倒、心颠倒;于苦作「乐」想——这是想颠倒、心颠倒。这是四种颠倒。「因此」(Tenāti):即使其他八种颠倒已被断除,但由于如上所说的四种颠倒还未断除的缘故。「他的」(Assāti):指长老的。「压迫」(Maddatīti):仅以触碰就好像要压迫一样,否则被它压迫的众生就会死亡。「能做什么呢,不能做什么呢」——这是意趣。为什么不能做呢?难道它不是已经进入了上首弟子的腹中吗?确实进入了,但那只是为了显示自己的威力,而不是以恼害为意图。然而在这里,基于恼害的意图而说「能做什么呢」,是因为他已证得了压碎心脏的方法。「相与光」(Nimittobhāsanti):在这里,对于「愿世尊住世一劫」(tiṭṭhatu bhagavā kappa)这祈请住世一整劫的请求,世尊以「阿难,无论任何人修习四神足……」等语,用间接的表述,借着自己修习四神足的威力,显示出能够住世一劫的能力,由此生起的相,就是「nimitta」(相);而舍离这种方便,直接显露出自己意趣的光明,就是「obhāsa」(光)。「明知」(Jānantoyeva vāti):明知自己被魔缠缚的状态。因为归咎于自己的过失,会让众生的忧愁变得淡薄,不会太强,所以他说:「以归咎于魔而使忧愁微薄」(dosāropanena sokatanukaraṇatthaṃ)。那么,长老在被魔缠缚心时发生的事情,他是后来才知道的吗?以他自己的能力,是不知道的;但借着佛的威力,他才得以知晓。显示巴利原文
Pariyuṭṭhitacittoti yathā kiñci atthānatthaṃ sallakkhetuṃ na sakkā, evaṃ abhibhūtacitto. So pana abhibhavo mahatā udakoghena appakassa udakassa ajjhottharaṇaṃ viya ahosīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhotthaṭacitto’’ti. Aññopīti therato, ariyehi vā aññopi yo koci puthujjano. Puthujjanaggahaṇañcettha yathā sabbena sabbaṃ appahīnavipallāso mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto kiñci atthaṃ sallakkhetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ thero bhagavatā kataṃ nimittobhāsaṃ sabbaso na sallakkhesīti dassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘māro hī’’tiādi. Cattāro vipallāsāti asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti saññāvipallāso, cittavipallāso, dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti saññāvipallāso, cittavipallāsoti ime cattāro vipallāsā. Tenāti yadipi itare aṭṭha vipallāsā pahīnā, tathāpi yathāvuttānaṃ catunnaṃ vipallāsānaṃ appahīnabhāvena. Assāti therassa. Maddatīti phusanamattena maddanto viya hoti, aññathā tena maddite sattānaṃ maraṇameva siyā. Kiṃ sakkhissati, na sakkhissatīti adhippāyo. Kasmā na sakkhissati, nanu esa aggasāvakassa kucchiṃ paviṭṭhoti? Saccaṃ paviṭṭho, tañca kho attano ānubhāvadassanatthaṃ, na vibādhanādhippāyena. Vibādhanādhippāyena pana idha ‘‘kiṃ sakkhissatī’’ti vuttaṃ hadayamaddanassa adhigatattā. Nimittobhāsanti ettha ‘‘tiṭṭhatu bhagavā kappa’’nti sakalakappaṃ avaṭṭhānayācanāya ‘‘yassa kassaci ānanda cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā’’tiādinā aññāpadesena attano caturiddhipādabhāvanānubhāvena kappaṃ avaṭṭhānasamatthatāvasena saññuppādanaṃ nimittaṃ, tathā pana pariyāyaṃ muñcitvā ujukaṃyeva attano adhippāyavibhāvanaṃ obhāso. Jānantoyeva vāti mārena pariyuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ jānanto eva. Attano aparādhahetuto sattānaṃ soko tanuko hoti, na balavāti āha ‘‘dosāropanena sokatanukaraṇattha’’nti. Kiṃ pana thero mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittakāle pavattiṃ pacchā jānātīti? Na jānāti sabhāvena, buddhānubhāvena pana anujānāti.
魔请求的注释显示巴利原文
Mārayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
168 168.“使入于无益”:引导众生入于无益之行,以此杀害其功德;又因其系缚离贪,成为结生的因,好像众生在每一处结生后,便将其杀害一般,故说“杀害故,为魔”。因其极度邪恶,故为“恶者”。因具足黑法,故为“黑者”。因终结离贪等功德,故为“终者”。于能导致众生无益的恶行从不放过,故为“不放逸者”。以自己的魔索束缚放逸之人,或放逸之人是其眷属,故为“放逸者之亲”。“于第八个七日”:是指第七个七日之后的七天。这样说并非如床座七日等那样,因为并没有一个名为“第八个七日”的固定事务可得。在第七个七日之后,世尊于阿迦巴喇尼拘律树下,了知大梵天和天帝释已请求说法,魔便生起忧恼,心想:“如今他就要以说法让众生超越我的领域了。”于是魔这样思惟:“好吧,现在我便施设方便,令他般涅槃,这样他的心愿便会落空,而我的心愿将会成就。”显示巴利原文
168.Anatthe niyojento guṇamāraṇena māreti, virāgavibandhanena vā jātinimittatāya tattha tattha jātaṃ jātaṃ mārento viya hotīti ‘‘māretīti māro’’ti vuttaṃ. Ativiya pāpatāya pāpimā. Kaṇhadhammehi samannāgato kaṇho. Virāgādiguṇānaṃ antakaraṇato antako. Sattānaṃ anatthāvahapaṭipattiṃ na muccatīti namuci. Attano mārapāsena pamatte bandhati, pamattā vā bandhū etassāti pamattabandhu. Sattamasattāhato paraṃ satta ahāni sandhāyāha ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’ti na pana pallaṅkasattāhādi viya niyatakiccassa aṭṭhamasattāhassa nāma labbhanato. Sattamasattāhassa hi parato ajapālanigrodhamūle mahābrahmuno, sakkassa ca devarañño paṭiññātadhammadesanaṃ bhagavantaṃ ñatvā ‘‘idāni satte dhammadesanāya mama visayaṃ atikkamāpessatī’’ti sañjātadomanasso hutvā ṭhito cintesi ‘‘handa dānāhaṃ naṃ upāyena parinibbāpessāmi, evamassa manoratho aññathattaṃ gamissati, mama ca manoratho ijjhissatī’’ti . Evaṃ pana cintetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃ antaṃ ṭhito ‘‘parinibbātu dāni bhante bhagavā’’tiādinā parinibbānaṃ yāci, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’tiādi. Tattha ajjāti āyusaṅkhārossajjanadivasaṃ sandhāyāha. Bhagavā cassa abhisandhiṃ jānantopi taṃ anāvikatvā parinibbānassa akālabhāvameva pakāsento yācanaṃ paṭikkhipi. Tenāha ‘‘na tāvāha’’ntiādi.
「以道而聪慧」:指借由证悟圣谛的聪慧而聪慧。「同样地已调伏」:指以道断除烦恼而调伏。「同样地自信」:唯由证得圣道,于导师教法中得无所畏而自信,即因远离了见、疑等令人退缩的不善法,达至自信的状态。凡依其听闻而能从轮回之苦中出离的,此处以最胜的指示将其称为「所闻」,因而说「以三藏之故」。三藏的集合为三藏,或三藏即是三藏,三藏即三藏,依此而言。「正是那」:指那个作为应听对象而被说为「所闻」的三藏本身。「法」:指教理之法。「受持」:如置于金器中的狮子乳般,使其不坏失,以熟练掌握、善巧运作的状态受持于心。如此依教理之法显示了多闻持法的状态后,为了同样依证悟之法来显示它,便说了「或者」等词。「于圣法」:指道果之法,或九种出世间法。「成为随法」:指为了证得而成为随顺之法。「随顺道」:即指观法,或六种清净。「随法」:指对于上述修行道路随顺的、素净的少欲等法。「行戒」:指受持、保持不辍的戒。或者,因道果法随其后而称为「随法」,即导向出起的观,这观的持行就是「行戒」。「自己师尊之说」:显示巴利原文
Maggavasena viyattāti saccasampaṭivedhaveyyattiyena byattā. Tatheva vinītāti maggavasena kilesānaṃ samucchedavinayanena vinītā. Tathā visāradāti ariyamaggādhigameneva satthusāsane vesārajjappattiyā visāradā , sārajjakarānaṃ diṭṭhivicikicchādipāpadhammānaṃ vigamena visāradabhāvaṃ pattāti attho. Yassa sutassa vasena vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇaṃ sambhavati, taṃ idha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ‘‘suta’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘tepiṭakavasenā’’ti. Tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samūho tepiṭakaṃ, tīṇi vā piṭakāni tipiṭakaṃ, tipiṭakameva tepiṭakaṃ, tassa vasena. Tamevāti yaṃ taṃ tepiṭakaṃ sotabbabhāvena ‘‘suta’’nti vuttaṃ, tameva. Dhammanti pariyattidhammaṃ. Dhārentīti suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittasīhavasaṃ viya avinassantaṃ katvā suppaguṇasuppavattibhāvena dhārenti hadaye ṭhapenti. Iti pariyattidhammavasena bahussutadhammadharabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni paṭivedhadhammavasenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ariyadhammassāti maggaphaladhammassa, navavidhassāpi vā lokuttaradhammassa. Anudhammabhūtanti adhigamāya anurūpadhammabhūtaṃ. Anucchavikapaṭipadanti ca tameva vipassanādhammamāha, chabbidhā visuddhiyo vā. Anudhammanti tassā yathāvuttapaṭipadāya anurūpaṃ abhisallekhitaṃ appicchatādidhammaṃ. Caraṇasīlāti samādāya pavattanasīlā. Anu maggaphaladhammo etissāti vā anudhammā, vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā, tassā caraṇasīlā. Attano ācariyavādanti attano ācariyassa sammāsambuddhassa vādaṃ. Sadevakassa lokassa ācārasikkhāpanena ācariyo, bhagavā. Tassa vādo, catusaccadesanā.
「将宣说」:指将从最初讲起,即按自己受持的次第令他人亦受持、掌握。「将开示」:指将诵读并正确令人领悟圣典文句。「将令知」:指将使他人了知,即标明出来。「将安立」:指以种种方式确立、阐明。「将开显」:指使法义公开显露。「将分别」:指将加以分析说明。「将显了」:指令不明显、深奥之处变得明白易见。「连同法」:在此,「法」是原因的转用,如同「于因之智是法无碍解」等句,故说「以有因、有理由的话」。「有教诫神变」:指具有出离的作用,如同驳倒对方、确立己方,以因由和实例成就所证之义而说法,故说:「将教导导出轮回之法」,意即启发九种出世间法。这里,以「将令知」等六词显示了六个义句,前两词则显示了六个文句。如此,以注释之法归纳显示了三藏佛语。《导论》中说:「十二句之经,他们既是文句,亦是意义」。显示巴利原文
Ācikkhissantīti ādito kathessanti, attanā uggahitaniyāmena pare uggaṇhāpessantīti attho. Desessantīti vācessanti, pāḷiṃ sammā pabodhessantīti attho. Paññāpessantīti pajānāpessanti, saṅkāpessantīti attho. Paṭṭhapessantīti pakārehi ṭhapessanti, pakāsessantīti attho. Vivarissantīti vivaṭaṃ karissanti. Vibhajissantīti vibhattaṃ karissanti. Uttāniṃ karissantīti anuttānaṃ gambhīraṃ uttānaṃ pākaṭaṃ karissanti. Saha dhammenāti ettha dhamma-saddo kāraṇapariyāyo ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 270) viyāti āha ‘‘sahetukena sakāraṇena vacanenā’’ti. Sappāṭihāriyanti sanissaraṇaṃ , yathā paravādaṃ bhañjitvā sakavādo patiṭṭhahati, evaṃ hetudāharaṇehi yathādhigatamatthaṃ sampādetvā dhammaṃ kathessanti. Tenāha ‘‘niyyānikaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessantī’’ti, navavidhaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ pabodhessantīti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘paññāpessantī’’tiādīhi chahi padehi cha atthapadāni dassitāni, ādito pana dvīhi padehi cha byañjanapadāni. Ettāvatā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayena saṅgahetvā dassitaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ nettiyaṃ ‘‘dvādasapadāni suttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ byañjanañca attho cā’’ti (netti. saṅkhāre).
「被包含于三学」:指被纳入增上戒学等三学之中。「完整的教法梵行」:指毫无遗漏的、作为导师教法的最胜梵行。「成就」:指完全地增长、圆满。「以禅那味」:指通过诸比丘证得的禅那之乐。「达到增长」:指进入殊胜微妙状态而达到全面的增长。如同枝叶繁茂,以神通的成就——凭借诸神通——令教法达到了增长的顶点。「以安住」:即安住之义,达到了稳固的状态。「以通达为众人之利益」:即「众人」之意,因此说:「以众人的证悟故」。「广布」:指广大而普遍地生起,或广大而普遍地达到,故说:「具足一切相状……达到」。「善显了」:指以初善、中善、后善等方式,完全地正确宣说。显示巴利原文
Sikkhattayasaṅgahitanti adhisīlasikkhādisikkhattayasaṅgahaṇaṃ. Sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyanti anavasesaṃ satthusāsanabhūtaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ. Samiddhanti sammadeva vaḍḍhitaṃ. Jhānassādavasenāti tehi tehi bhikkhūhi samadhigatajhānasukhavasena. Vuddhippattanti uḷārapaṇītabhāvagamanena sabbaso parivuddhiṃ upagataṃ. Sabbapāliphullaṃ viya abhiññāsampattivasena abhiññāsampadāhi sāsanābhivuddhiyā matthakappattito. Patiṭṭhitavasenāti patiṭṭhānavasena, patiṭṭhappattiyāti attho. Paṭivedhavasena bahuno janassa hitanti bāhujaññaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bahujanābhisamayavasenā’’ti. Puthu puthulaṃ bhūtaṃ jātaṃ, puthu vā puthuttaṃ bhūtaṃ pattanti puthubhūtaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbākāra…pe… patta’’nti. Suṭṭhu pakāsitanti suṭṭhu sammadeva ādikalyāṇādibhāvena paveditaṃ.
这是关于舍寿行的注释。显示巴利原文
Āyusaṅkhāraossajjanavaṇṇanā
169 「以善建立正念后」:这个由色身等构成的、名为‘有身’的苦重担,我已背负如此之久,而今不应再背负。为卸下此担,我于更长久中积聚了圣道资粮,如今我已通达圣道,由此,这些色身等依不净等特性,已被如实地遍知。我将四种正念,如实地安立于各自所缘。
「以智慧抉择后」:此名为‘有身’的苦重担,其自利之义,已于菩提树下圆满;而利他之行——调御诸应度者,尚有未竟,并将在仅余三月之期即达圆满。是故他作此说:‘我将于卫塞月满月日般涅槃。’如此,以佛陀的智慧抉择后,于一切处作决定已。
「他舍置了寿行」:他舍置了那作为寿命、生命构造者的法——也就是果等至,心中决意:‘我不再入此定。’借由舍置此定,他也等同于舍置了由此维系的生命之流,心中决意:‘我将不再延续生命。’因此,注释中说:‘在那里……’等等。大地震动之所以巨大,既因其生起的范围广大,也因其展现的形态宏大。为使众人……显示巴利原文
169.Satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvāti ayaṃ kāyādivibhāgo attabhāvasaññito dukkhabhāro mayā ettakaṃ kālaṃ vahito, idāni pana na vahitabbo, etassa avahanatthaṃ cirataraṃ kālaṃ ariyamaggasambhāro sambhato, svāyaṃ ariyamaggo paṭividdho, yato ime kāyādayo asubhādito sammadeva pariññātā, catubbidhampi sammāsatiṃ yathātathaṃ visaye suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitaṃ katvā. Ñāṇena paricchinditvāti yasmā imassa attabhāvasaññitassa dukkhabhārassa vahane payojanabhūtaṃ attahitaṃ tāva mahābodhimūle eva parisamāpitaṃ, parahitaṃ pana buddhaveneyyavinayanaṃ parisamāpitabbaṃ, taṃ idāni māsattayeneva parisamāpanaṃ pāpuṇissati, tasmā abhāsi ‘‘visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ parinibbāyissāmī’’ti, evaṃ buddhañāṇena paricchinditvā sabbabhāgena nicchayaṃ katvā. Āyusaṅkhāraṃ vissajjīti āyuno jīvitassa abhisaṅkhārakaṃ phalasamāpattidhammaṃ ‘‘na samāpajjissāmī’’ti vissajji taṃvissajjaneneva tena abhisaṅkhariyamānaṃ jīvitasaṅkhāraṃ ‘‘nappavattessāmī’’ti vissajji. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Ṭhānamahantatāyapi pavattiākāramahantatāyapi mahanto pathavīkampo. Tattha ṭhānamahantatāya bhūmicālassa mahattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tadā kira…pe… kampitthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana jātikkhettabhūtā dasasahassī lokadhātu eva, na yā kāci, yā mahābhinīhāramahājātiādīsupi kampittha. Tadāpi tattikāya eva kampane kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ? Jātikkhettabhāvena tasseva ādito pariggahassa katattā. Pariggahakaraṇaṃ cassa dhammatāvasena veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi purimabuddhānampi tāvatakameva jātikkhettaṃ ahosi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘dasasahassī lokadhātū, nissaddā honti nirākulā…pe… mahāsamuddo ābhujati, dasasahassī pakampatī’’ti ca ādi (bu. vaṃ. 84-91). Udakapariyantaṃ katvā chappakārapavedhanena avītarāge bhiṃsetīti bhiṃsano, so eva bhiṃsanakoti āha ‘‘bhayajanako’’ti. Devabheriyoti devadundubhisaddassa pariyāyavacanamattaṃ. Na cettha kāci bherī ‘‘devadundubhī’’ti adhippetā, atha kho uppātabhāvena labbhamāno ākāsagato nigghosasaddo. Tenāha ‘‘devo’’tiādi. Devoti megho. Tassa hi acchabhāvena ākāsassa vassābhāvena sukkhagajjitasaññite sadde niccharante devadundubhisamaññā. Tenāha ‘‘devo sukkhagajjitaṃ gajjī’’ti.
「因喜悦冲力而发」:世尊心想:‘这个名为‘有身’的苦重担,我已背负如此之久,如今不久即将卸下!’生起强烈的喜悦,遂依其本然,唱出这首受喜悦冲力而发的感兴语。为表明在这样唱出感兴语的同时,另一层意义也得以成就,注释中设问:‘为何……’等等。显示巴利原文
Pītivegavissaṭṭhanti ‘‘evaṃ cirataraṃ kālaṃ vahito ayaṃ attabhāvasaññito dukkhabhāro, idāni na cirasseva nikkhipissatī’’ti sañjātasomanasso bhagavā sabhāveneva pītivegavissaṭṭhaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Evaṃ pana udānentena ayampi attho sādhito hotīti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「可称量的」:为表明‘称量’一词是从作业所成的角度来理解的,故说‘已被称量的’。因能力微弱,它是被限定、有局限的。正因为它周遭被分割、削弱,故被称为‘微小’。
「不可称量的」:因其能镇伏对立、长时间相续,以及果报广大,所以它是无法被度量、无法被局限的。下文将‘无色界定’称为「不可称量」,是因为对于那些先前笼统被称为‘不可称量’的广大心,令无色界定比色界定更为殊胜的那些原因,于此皆悉具足。而另一类则被称作「可称量」。
在三类业中,果报小而微劣、低下的,是‘可称量’的;果报大而殊胜的,是‘不可称量’的。至于那些处于中间层面的业,则应当将其分为‘低劣的’与‘殊胜的’两类,然后相应归入此二部分。应当按照‘低劣三法解释’中所说的方法,确定果报的多寡,再依此来理解‘可称量’与‘不可称量’的区别。
「能出生」:因为从此中出生,故名为‘所生’,因此说为‘作为产生之因的’。
「专精于内」:通过观察自身相续中的诸法,并反复修习所缘,而变得精进热爱。
「称为‘所生’的」:它……显示巴利原文
Tulīyatīti tulanti tula-saddo kammasādhanoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tulita’’nti vuttaṃ. Appānubhāvatāya paricchinnaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ parito khaṇḍitabhāvena ‘‘paritta’’nti vuccati. Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanato dīghasantānatāya, vipulaphalatāya ca na tulaṃ na paricchinnaṃ. Yehi kāraṇehi pubbe avisesato mahaggataṃ ‘‘atula’’nti vuttaṃ, tāni kāraṇāni rūpāvacarato āruppassa sātisayāni vijjantīti ‘‘arūpāvacaraṃ atula’’nti vuttaṃ, itarañca ‘‘tula’’nti, appavipākaṃ tīsupi kammesu yaṃ tanuvipākaṃ hīnaṃ, taṃ tulaṃ. Bahuvipākanti yaṃ mahāvipākaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ atulaṃ. Yaṃ panettha majjhimaṃ, taṃ hīnaṃ, ukkaṭṭhanti dvidhā bhinditvā dvīsu bhāgesu pakkhipitabbaṃ. Hīnattikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva appabahuvipākataṃ niddhāretvā tassa vasena tulātulabhāvo veditabbo. Sambhavati etasmāti sambhavoti āha ‘‘sambhavassa hetubhūta’’nti. Niyakajjhattaratoti sasantānadhammesu vipassanāvasena, gocarāsevanāya ca nirato. Savipākaṃ samānaṃ pavattivipākamattadāyikammaṃ savipākaṭṭhena sambhavaṃ. Na ca taṃ kāmādibhavābhisaṅkhārakanti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘sambhava’’nti vatvā ‘‘bhavasaṅkhāra’’nti vuttaṃ. Ossajjīti ariyamaggena avassajji . Kavacaṃ viya attabhāvaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ attani sambhūtattā attasambhavaṃ kilesañca abhindīti kilesabhedasahabhāvikammossajjanaṃ dassento tadubhayassa kāraṇaṃ avoca ‘‘ajjhattarato samāhito’’ti.
“在审察、在衡量时”:他以“生起是恐怖,不生起是安稳”等方式进行审量。为了详细阐明前面“在审察、在衡量”等简略语句所含之义,他在讲述了“五蕴”等内容之后,具体显示了舍断“有行”的情形。进而通过“如是”等语,以总结的方式呈现了《感兴语注释》开头已说的法义。显示巴利原文
Tīrentoti ‘‘uppādo bhayaṃ, anuppādo khema’’ntiādinā vīmaṃsanto. ‘‘Tulento tīrento’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcakkhandhā’’ti ādiṃ vatvā bhavasaṅkhārassa avassajjanākāraṃ sarūpato dassesi. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā pana udānavaṇṇanāyaṃ ādito vuttamatthaṃ nigamanavasena dassesi.
大地震动的释义显示巴利原文
Mahābhūmicālavaṇṇanā
171 “当……时(yanti)”:意指它可为工具格、依处格或主格,故说“在那时,或在那时”。“上举风(ukkhepakavātā)”:即中断了持水风,从其安住之处吹起之风。“六十……厚”此仅就风的高度而言;至于长宽,则能中断等同一万个轮围世界的持水风。“于空中(ākāse)”:在先前由风所安立之处。“再次的风(puna vāto)”:上举风如此作用并消失后,持水风再度结合执持,以支撑的结合与扩展,使水不下沉,令其结合而执持。“由此,水向上涌起(tato udakaṃ uggacchati)”:从那种结合执持中,为彼风所支撑的水向上升起、向上移动。“是有发生的(hotiyeva)”:时为间隔而发。“因广大(bahalabhāvena)”:由于大地的巨大性。因为大地整体当时正在下沉、上昇,故其震动不显。显示巴利原文
171. Yanti karaṇe vā adhikaraṇe vā paccattavacananti adhippāyena āha ‘‘yena samayena, yasmiṃ vā samaye’’ti. Ukkhepakavātāti udakasandhārakavātaṃ upacchinditvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato khepakavātā. ‘‘Saṭṭhi…pe… bahala’’nti idaṃ tassa vātassa ubbedhappamāṇameva gahetvā vuttaṃ, āyāmavitthārato pana dasasahassacakkavāḷappamāṇampi udakasandhārakavātaṃ upacchindatiyeva. Ākāseti pubbe vātena patiṭṭhitokāse. Puna vātoti ukkhepakavāte tathākatvā vigate udakasandhārakavāto puna ābandhitvāgaṇhāti yathā taṃ udakaṃ na bhassati, evaṃ utthambhentaṃ ābandhanavitānavasena bandhitvā gaṇhāti. Tato udakaṃ uggacchatīti tato ābandhitvā gahaṇato tena vātena utthambhitaṃ udakaṃ uggacchati upari gacchati. Hotiyevāti antarantarā hotiyeva. Bahalabhāvenāti mahāpathaviyā mahantabhāvena. Sakalā hi mahāpathavī tadā oggacchati, uggacchati ca, tasmā kampanaṃ na paññāyati.
“其成功(ijjhanassāti)”:即成就所欲之事、享受自在圆满等应受用者。“小(parittā)”:仅是少许获得,尚未善加修习。如此,修习力不强,故称“弱”。此处实以“想”之名而说修习。“无量(appamāṇā)”:指修习已纯熟、完善。此修习坚固而更强,故说“强”。所谓“小地想,无量水想”,仅仅是随顺教说。应知此中意旨:若水想善修,则大地震动易于成就。“使敬畏,或探究(saṃvejento vīmaṃsanto)”:令耽着天界成就而放逸的天王帝释心生敬畏,或探究自己刚证得的神通力。大目犍连长老的宫殿震动众所周知,故不赘述;为显示僧伽罗克希达沙弥的宫殿震动,乃言:“据说这位尊者……”等。“有腐臭味(pūtigandho)”:此中有腐败之气,因此为“腐臭者”。以此腐臭,如同凭气味而知为母胎所生,故说“以臭气为头”,意谓此孩童极度臭秽。显示巴利原文
Ijjhanassāti icchitatthasijjhanassa. Anubhavitabbassaissariyasampattiādikassa. Parittāti paṭiladdhamattā nātisubhāvitā. Tathā ca bhāvanā balavatī na hotīti āha ‘‘dubbalā’’ti. Saññāsīsena hi bhāvanā vuttā. Appamāṇāti paguṇā subhāvitā. Sā hi thirā daḷhatarā hotīti āha ‘‘balavā’’ti. ‘‘Parittā pathavīsaññā, appamāṇā āposaññā’’ti desanāmattameva, āposaññāya pana subhāvitāya pathavīkampo sukheneva ijjhatīti ayamettha adhippāyo veditabbo. Saṃvejento dibbasampattiyā pamattaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ. Vīmaṃsanto vā tāvadeva samadhigataṃ attano iddhibalaṃ. Mahāmoggallānattherassa pāsādakampanaṃ pākaṭanti taṃ anāmasitvā saṅgharakkhitasāmaṇerassa pāsādakampanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so kirāyasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pūtimisso gandho etassāti pūtigandho, tena pūtigandheneva adhigatamātukucchisambhavaṃ viya gandheneva sīsena, ativiya dārako evāti attho.
Ācariyanti:意为老师的教导。所谓“神通构造”,是指应通过对治神通类别的对立面等方式来成就;但由于自己未能正确掌握方便善巧,所以尚未善学,故说:“你未经训练便投入战斗。” 以“浮动”一词,是说要通过将整个宫殿基址化为水,使所决意的宫殿在那里浮动。他以譬喻说明决意的次第时,说:“孩子……应了知。” 其中,“盘中小饼”即煎饼。制作时,先在盘上放少许面糊,渐次增加,最终做出边界分明的饼,令四周界限清晰。同样,他以此譬喻教导:“依水遍之力,决意‘愿宫殿所立之处成为水’时,应这样决意:从宫殿的四周到边际,一切皆令成水。”显示巴利原文
Ācariyanti ācariyūpadesaṃ. Iddhābhisaṅkhāro nāma iddhividhappaṭipakkhādībhāvena icchitabbo, so ca upāye kosallassa attanā na sammā uggahitattā na tāva sikkhitoti āha ‘‘asikkhitvāva yuddhaṃ paviṭṭhosī’’ti. ‘‘Pilavanta’’nti iminā sakalameva pāsādavatthuṃ udakaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhātabbapāsādova tattha pilavatīti dasseti. Adhiṭṭhānakkamaṃ pana upamāya dassento ‘‘tāta…pe… jānāhī’’ti āha. Tattha kapallakapūvanti āsittakapūvaṃ, taṃ pacantā kapāle paṭhamaṃ kiñci piṭṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā anukkamena vaḍḍhetvā antantena paricchindanti pūvaṃ samantato paricchinnaṃ katvā ṭhapenti, evaṃ ‘‘āpokasiṇavasena ‘pāsādena patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ udakaṃ hotū’ti adhiṭṭhahanto samantato pāsādassa yāva pariyantā yathā udakaṃ hoti, tathā adhiṭṭhātabba’’nti upamāya upadisati.
正如《大本经》所说:“比丘们,此为法性:当菩萨从兜率天身殁,入母胎时,此一万世界震动、强烈震动、剧烈震动。”又说:“比丘们,此为法性:当菩萨从母胎出时,此一万世界震动、强烈震动、剧烈震动。”关于大菩萨的入胎与诞生,《大本经》依于法性说到了大地震动。因此,在其余四种场合,同样也是依法性而有大地震动,这就是《大本经》从意义上已经阐明的道理,也是说法者的意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Mahāpadānevuttamevāti ‘‘dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.18) vatvā ‘‘ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.18), tathā ‘‘dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.30) vatvā ‘‘ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.32) ca mahābodhisattassa gabbhokkantiyaṃ, abhijātiyañca dhammatāvasena mahāpadānepathavīkampassa vuttattā itaresupi catūsu ṭhānesu pathavīkampo dhammatāvasenevāti mahāpadāneatthato vuttaṃ evāti adhippāyo.
现在,为了从原因和现行方式上区分这些大地震动,故说“在这些之中……”等。“以界之扰动”:即由称为‘上举界’的风界之扰动。“以神通威力”:指藉由智慧神通力或业报神通力的威力,也就是威德力。“以福德威力”:指由福德之威力,即大菩萨的福德力。“以智慧威力”:指由证悟智慧之威力。“以给予喝彩的方式”:正如成正觉时,大地被非他人所能共有的证悟智慧之威力所撼动而震动;同样,说法时,大地也被非他人所能共有的说法智慧之威力所撼动而震动,这对如来而言,便如同大地给予喝彩一般。因此说“以给予喝彩的方式”。显示巴利原文
Idāni nesaṃ pathavīkampanaṃ kāraṇato, pavattiākārato ca vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iti imesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhātukopenāti ukkhepakadhātusaṅkhātāya vāyodhātuyā pakopena. Iddhānubhāvenāti ñāṇiddhiyā vā kammavipākajiddhiyā vā pabhāvena, tejenāti attho. Puññatejenāti puññānubhāvena, mahābodhisattassa puññabalenāti attho. Ñāṇatejenāti paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvena. Sādhukāradānavasenāti yathā anaññasādhāraṇena paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvena abhihatā mahāpathavī abhisambodhiyaṃ akampittha, evaṃ anaññasādhāraṇena desanāñāṇānubhāvena abhihatā mahāpathavī akampittha, taṃ panassā sādhukāradānaṃ viya hotīti ‘‘sādhukāradānavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
然而,世尊——其色身具足三十二大人相与八十随形好,庄严微妙;其法身悉备一切行相完全清净的圣戒蕴等功德宝,已达福德广大、威力广大、神通广大、智慧广大的最极顶点,是无等、无等等、无与伦比的阿罗汉、正自觉者——虽有能力将称作‘自身’的五蕴安立一劫或超过一劫,但他以厌弃有为相所起的殊胜智,对五蕴视同草芥,以舍寿行的方式毫不恋著地舍弃了。大地为此威神力所冲激,于舍寿行时震动,而这正如同世尊悲愍自性的展现,故说‘以悲愍自性’。因为世尊于般涅槃时,次第入于二十四万亿类等至,并于其间入果等至;在此之前分,生起了极其猛利、敏捷的观智,世尊心中念道:‘我长久以来积集了不共他人的、达至究竟的智资粮,证得无上解脱,今日这到达顶点的究竟终止——无余涅槃界终于成就了。’由此生起了更为广大的喜悦;世尊因喜的遍满等功德之力而更为殊胜,生起了他人不共的智慧殊胜。正是仗这些至力所资益的智之殊胜威力,才说了‘这两份钵食同果同报’等语。因此,大地为此威力所冲激而震动,而那时的大地震动,恰如世尊发出的悲音,所以说‘第八种是哭……’。显示巴利原文
Yena pana bhagavā asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitadvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa- (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.198; ma. ni. 2.385) vicitrarūpakāyo sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanasamiddhidhammakāyo puññamahattathāmamahattayasamahaāiddhimahattapaññāmahattānaṃ paramukkaṃsagato asamo asamasamo appaṭipuggalo arahaṃ sammāsambuddho attano attabhāvasaññitaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ kappaṃ vā kappāvasesaṃ vā ṭhapetuṃ samatthopi saṅkhatadhammaṃ paṭijigucchanākārappavattena ñāṇavisesena tiṇāyapi amaññamāno āyusaṅkhārossajjanavidhinā nirapekkho ossajji. Tadanubhāvābhihatā mahāpathavī āyusaṅkhārossajjane akampittha, taṃ panassā kāruññasabhāvasaṇṭhitā viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāruññasabhāvenā’’ti . Yasmā bhagavā parinibbānasamaye catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo samāpajji antarantarā phalasamāpattisamāpajjanena, tassa pubbabhāge sātisayaṃ tikkhaṃ sūraṃ vipassanāñāṇañca pavattesi, ‘‘yadatthañca mayā evaṃ sucirakālaṃ anaññasādhāraṇo paramukkaṃsagato ñāṇasambhāro sambhato, anuttaro ca vimokkho samadhigato, tassa vata me sikhāppattaphalabhūtā accantaniṭṭhā anupādisesanibbānadhātu ajja samijjhatī’’ti bhiyyo ativiya somanassappattassa bhagavato pītivipphārādiguṇavipulatarānubhāvo parehi asādhāraṇañāṇātisayo udapādi, yassa samāpattibalasamupabrūhitassa ñāṇātisayassa ānubhāvaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dveme piṇḍapātā samasamaphalā samasamavipākā’’tiādi (udā. 75), tasmā tassa ānubhāvena samabhihatā mahāpathavī akampittha. Taṃ panassā tassaṃ velāyaṃ ārodanākārappatti viya hotīti ‘‘aṭṭhamo ārodanenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了开显前面略说的义理,而讲述‘入母胎时’等。而所谓‘以随喜赞叹之力……’等所阐明的义理是这样的:以地神之力来说——如大海有海神一般,据说大地也有上首天神存在。当有那样的因缘时,随彼天神的心念,此大地便震动、大震、颤摇,正如风云等天神的心念生起时,风便吹动,冷云天神、暖云天神、雨云天神的心念生起时,便有冷、暖等现象出现。例如,在毗舍佉月圆之日,为证得正等觉而坐于菩提树下的世间怙主,为了摧破前来作障的魔军——显示巴利原文
Idāni saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘mātukucchiṃ okkamante’’tiādimāha. Ayaṃ panatthoti ‘‘sādhukāradānavasenā’’tiādinā vutto attho. Pathavīdevatāya vasenāti ettha samuddadevatā viya mahāpathaviyā adhidevatā kira nāma atthi. Tādise kāraṇe sati tassā cittavasena ayaṃ mahāpathavī saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati, yathā vātavalāhakadevatānaṃ cittavasena vātā vāyanti, sītuṇhaabbhavassavalāhakadevatānaṃ cittavasena sītādayo bhavanti. Tathā hi visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ abhisambodhiatthaṃ bodhirukkhamūle nisinnassa lokanāthassa antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ mārabalaṃ vidhamituṃ –
‘此大地无心,不知乐与苦;’
愿以我的布施之力,令大地震动七次。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Acetanāyaṃ pathavī, aviññāya sukhaṃ dukhaṃ; Sāpi dānabalā mayhaṃ, sattakkhattuṃ pakampathā’’ti. (cariyā. 1.124) –
话音刚落,大地便裂开,将魔连同其眷属一起掀翻。此处所说即是喝采等事。大地虽无心,但依前述道理,可说是法性使然。而法性,从义理上说,即法的本性,也就是福德法或智慧法的威神力本性。这一切都经过审察,并由此而有:显示巴利原文
Vacanasamanantaraṃ mahāpathavī bhijjitvā saparisaṃ māraṃ parivattesi. Etanti sādhukāradānādi. Yadipi natthi acetanattā, dhammatāvasena pana vuttanayena siyāti sakkā vattuṃ. Dhammatā pana atthato dhammasabhāvo, so puññadhammassa vā ñāṇadhammassa vā ānubhāvasabhāvoti. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ vicāritameva, evañca katvā –
如理观察此法,自性、味、相;
以法之威力,大地与十千世界悉皆震动。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ime dhamme sammasato, sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇe; Dhammatejena vasudhā, dasasahassī pakampathā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 1.166);
如此,起始的言辞便得以成立。显示巴利原文
Ādi vacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti.
「已说例证」意指对所阐述义理的归结,也就是总结。「至此」是说,通过地动等事的发生,并显示世尊正是地动之因,至此。“今日世尊必定弃舍了寿行”——这是长老依「余类智」而觉察的。因为那时长老这样审察:此地震并非地界扰乱所起,由于找不出扰乱的相状;在佛陀时代,外道当中并无具有如此大威神力的仙人;教内之人,也不会不禀告导师就作出此事;其余五种原因此时都不可能发生;而且此地震极为恐怖,令人毛发竖立。因此,从余类智推断出:“今日世尊弃舍了寿行。”显示巴利原文
Niddiṭṭhanidassananti niddiṭṭhassa atthassa niyyātanaṃ, nigamananti attho. Ettāvatāti pathavīkampādiuppādajananena ceva pathavīkampassa bhagavato hetunidassanena ca. ‘‘Addhā ajja bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭho’’ti sallakkhesi pārisesañāyena. Evañhi tadā thero tamatthaṃ vīmaṃseyya nāyaṃ bhūmikampo dhātuppakopahetuko tassa apaññāyamānarūpattā, bāhirakopi isi evaṃ mahānubhāvo buddhakāle natthi, sāsanikopi satthu anārocetvā evaṃ karonto nāma natthi, sesānaṃ pañcannaṃ idāni asambhavo, evaṃ bhūmikampo cāyaṃ mahābhiṃsanako salomahaṃso ahosi, tasmā pārisesato āha ‘‘ajja bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭhoti sallakkhesī’’ti.
「八种众」的注释。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaparisavaṇṇanā
172 「不给予机会」:即当那位长老以“尊者,愿世尊住世一劫”等语提出请求时,未给予他机会。
他将其他“八支”也总括起来,从八因开始,以众、胜处、解脱而含摄了三种八支,由此说出“确实有八种……”等语。
有人说:“这是为了避免阿难长老生起悲伤,并使他分心。”他们认为,若突然说出,可能会生起强烈的悲伤。显示巴利原文
172.Okāsaṃ adatvāti ‘‘tiṭṭhatu bhante bhagavā kappa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.178) nayappavattāya therassa āyācanāya avasaraṃ adatvā. Aññānipi aṭṭhakāni sampiṇḍento hetuaṭṭhakato aññāni parisābhibhāyatanavimokkhavasena tīṇi aṭṭhakāni saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘aṭṭha kho imā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Āyasmato ānandassa sokuppattiṃ pariharanto vikkhepaṃ karonto’’ti keci sahasā bhaṇite balavasoko uppajjeyyāti.
「集会」:由于应当集合,或因集合义,故称“集会”,即众。以频婆娑罗王为首的集会,名为频婆娑罗集会。其余两种集会亦然。“频婆娑罗……等集会”与“相似的刹帝利众”,应作如是联结。在其他轮围世界,导师同样会前往刹帝利众等集会。
「谈说」:最初导师与那些众一起言语,称为谈说。
「对谈」:一问一答的交谈,称为对谈。
「法谈」:围绕法的提问与反问、法义讨论,称为法谈。
「身形」:指基于身形的谈论,因为“色”一词有时指身形,如“化作大身象王之身”等语中所用。
「那些」:此词包含两个方面:“他们的相状与形体,恰如导师的身相,但这只是他们自己这样认为。”也不是说世尊戴着宝石耳环,应如此理解。
「声断」:指声音像裂成两半一样。
「伽伽声」:指沙哑的声音。
「别的语言」:指与那些众生的语言不相同的音声。
「思察」:即思考。
“为什么……而说法”这句话,是带着这样的意图:先让他们认识自己之后再说法,他们便会生起更殊胜的净信,难道不是吗?对于那些不先认识自己、一听法就能生起净信的人,就不必先令其认识而说法,导师……显示巴利原文
Samāgantabbato, samāgacchatīti vā samāgamo, parisā. Bimbisārapamukho samāgamo bimbisārasamāgamo. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Bimbisāra…pe… samāgamādisadisaṃ khattiyaparisanti yojanā. Aññesu cakkavāḷesupi labbhateyeva satthu khattiyaparisādiupasaṅkamanaṃ. Ādito tehi saddhiṃ satthu bhāsanaṃ ālāpo. Kathanapaṭikathanaṃ sallāpo. Dhammupasañhitā pucchā paṭipucchā dhammasākacchā. Saṇṭhānaṃ paṭicca kathanaṃ saṇṭhānapariyāyattā vaṇṇa-saddassa ‘‘mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) viya. ‘‘Tesa’’nti padaṃ ubhayapadāpekkhaṃ ‘‘tesampi lakkhaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ viya satthu sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ kevalaṃ paññāyati evā’’ti. Nāpi āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalo bhagavā hotīti yojanā. Chinnassarāti dvidhābhūtassarā. Gaggarassarāti jajjaritassarā. Bhāsantaranti tesaṃ sattānaṃ bhāsato aññaṃ bhāsaṃ. Vīmaṃsāti cintanā. ‘‘Kimatthaṃ…pe… desetī’’ti idaṃ nanu attānaṃ jānāpetvā dhamme kathite tesaṃ sātisayo pasādo hotīti iminā adhippāyena vuttaṃ? Yesaṃ attānaṃ ajānāpetvāva dhamme kathite pasādo hoti, na jānāpetvā, tādise sandhāya satthā tathā karoti. Tattha payojanamāha ‘‘vāsanatthāyā’’ti. Evaṃ sutopīti evaṃ aviññātadesako aviññātāgamanopi suto dhammo attano dhammasudhammatāyeva anāgate paccayo hoti suṇantassa.
以“阿难”等开头的、未被收录于结集的巴利法,正是如此显示的。此理同样适用于此后诸如此类的情形。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ānandā’’tiādiko saṅgītianāruḷho pāḷidhammo eva tathā dassito. Esa nayo ito paresupi evarūpesu ṭhānesu.
解释八胜处显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanavaṇṇanā
173 ‘能征服’即是‘胜’,指遍作或智。拥有‘胜’作为‘处’的禅那,称为‘胜处’。或者,拥有应被征服的所缘之‘处’,也称为‘胜处’。由于征服所缘而称为‘胜’,并且此禅那是瑜伽行者殊胜乐等的依止处,又因属于意处与法处,因此连同相应法的禅那便称为‘胜处’。由此说‘胜的原因’等。这里,‘这些’即指那些名为胜处的禅那。‘由于补特伽罗的智最胜性’这一句,应结合两者来理解。如何结合呢?以对立的方式征服对立之法,以及由于补特伽罗的智最胜性而征服所缘。确实,以慧力征服所缘,正如同征服对立面一样。显示巴利原文
173. Abhibhavatīti abhibhu, parikammaṃ, ñāṇaṃ vā. Abhibhu āyatanaṃ etassāti abhibhāyatanaṃ, jhānaṃ. Abhibhavitabbaṃ vā ārammaṇasaṅkhātaṃ āyatanaṃ etassāti abhibhāyatanaṃ. Ārammaṇābhibhavanato abhibhu ca taṃ āyatanañca yogino sukhavisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, manāyatanadhammāyatanabhāvato vātipi sasampayuttaṃ jhānaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘abhibhavanakāraṇānī’’tiādi. Tāni hīti abhibhāyatanasaññitāni jhānāni. ‘‘Puggalassa ñāṇuttariyatāyā’’ti idaṃ ubhayatthāpi yojetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Paṭipakkhabhāvena paccanīkadhamme abhibhavanti puggalassa ñāṇuttariyatāya ārammaṇāni abhibhavanti. Ñāṇabaleneva hi ārammaṇābhibhavanaṃ viya paṭipakkhābhibhavo pīti.
通过遍作而成为‘内色想’,并非通过安止。因为以似相为所缘的安止不可能以内境为对象;然而,经由内遍作所得的遍相是不清净的,不像经由外遍作所得的遍相那样清净。显示巴利原文
Parikammavasena ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī, na appanāvasena. Na hi paṭibhāganimittārammaṇā appanā ajjhattavisayā sambhavati, taṃ pana ajjhattaparikammavasena laddhaṃ kasiṇanimittaṃ avisuddhameva hoti, na bahiddhāparikammavasena laddhaṃ viya visuddhaṃ.
‘小’:指如其所得,如筛盘般的量。因此他说‘未增大的’。即使在有颜色作意的情况下,此处也仅因状态小而称为胜处。因为,在此情况下,‘小’正是征服的原因。无论有颜色作意还是无有,胜处的修习唯利根智者能成办,非他人所能,所以他说‘智最胜的补特伽罗’。‘胜后而入定’:此处的‘胜’与‘入定’,是在证得近行禅那之后,随即生起安止禅那,故说‘在此与相生起的同时,便导入安止’。‘与相生起同时’是显示无安止间隔期的特征用语。即使被称为‘速通者’,也只有智最胜者能修习胜处。这里,‘在此’是指在此相上。‘导入安止’是指将修习导向安止。显示巴利原文
Parittānīti yathāladdhāni suppasarāvamattāni. Tenāha ‘‘avaḍḍhitānī’’ti. Parittavasenevāti vaṇṇavasena ābhoge vijjamānepi parittavaseneva idaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ vuttaṃ. Parittatā hettha abhibhavanassa kāraṇaṃ. Vaṇṇābhoge satipi asatipi abhibhāyatanabhāvanā nāma tikkhapaññasseva sambhavati, na itarassāti āha ‘‘ñāṇuttariko puggalo’’ti. Abhibhavitvā samāpajjatīti ettha abhibhavanaṃ, samāpajjanañca upacārajjhānādhigamasamanantarameva appanājhānuppādananti āha ‘‘saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetī’’ti. Saha nimittuppādenāti ca appanāparivāsābhāvassa lakkhaṇaṃ vacanametaṃ. Yo ‘‘khippābhiñño’’ti vuccati, tatopi ñāṇuttarasseva abhibhāyatanabhāvanā. Etthāti etasmiṃ nimitte. Appanaṃ pāpetīti bhāvanaṃ appanaṃ neti.
此处,有些人说:「当近行禅那生起之后,以彼为所缘,有低劣的二、三个速行心转起,它们属于近行禅那同类;随后,经有分间隔,无需近行的重复修习,安止即生起;与相俱生起,便导入安止。」这不过是他们自己的见解。因为安止并非依有分间隔的遍作而转起;也并非如广大、无量的禅那那样,必须对近行禅那进行观察。因此,是在证得近行禅那之后,经几个有分心而达到安止,故说「在此,与相俱生起便导入安止」。而「与相俱生起」这一表述,是意趣的表达,并非字面含义;其意趣应依前述方式理解,因为在安止中,当时不可能有那样的作意。应当这样看待:从定中出定后,依托前分修习的力量,把握在禅那刹那出现的征服状态而生起作意。然而在阿毗达摩注释中说:「以此说明了他的前作意。」针对「在安止中并没有那样的作意,为何说『以禅那想』?」这一问题,回答说:「有征服……等等。」显示巴利原文
Ettha ca keci ‘‘uppanne upacārajjhāne taṃ ārabbha ye heṭṭhimantena dve tayo javanavārā pavattanti, te upacārajjhānapakkhikā eva, tadanantarañca bhavaṅgaparivāsena, upacārāsevanāya ca vinā appanā hoti, saha nimittuppādeneva appanaṃ pāpetī’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Na hi parivāsitaparikammena appanāvāro icchito, nāpi mahaggatappamāṇajjhānesu viya upacārajjhāne ekantato paccavekkhaṇā icchitabbā, tasmā upacārajjhānādhigamanato paraṃ katipayabhavaṅgacittāvasāne appanaṃ pāpuṇanto ‘‘saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetī’’ti vutto. Saha nimittuppādenevāti ca adhippāyikamidaṃ vacanaṃ, na nītatthaṃ, adhippāyo vuttanayeneva veditabbo, na antosamāpattiyaṃ tadā tathārūpassa ābhogassa asambhavato. Samāpattito vuṭṭhitassa ābhogo pubbabhāgabhāvanāyavasena jhānakkhaṇe pavattaṃ abhibhavanākāraṃ gahetvā pavattoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘iminā tassa pubbābhogo kathito’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 204) vuttaṃ. Antosamāpattiyaṃ tathā ābhogābhāve kasmā ‘‘jhānasaññāyapī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘abhibhavana…pe… atthī’’ti.
「已增大的量」:指广大的量,并非以一指、二指等方式增大,因为在这里不可能那样增大。因此他说「大的」。「食增」:指将食器加大而施与的食物,意思是一个人一餐所食食物的半量。显示巴利原文
Vaḍḍhitappamāṇānīti vipulappamāṇānīti attho, na ekaṅguladvaṅgulādivasena vaḍḍhiṃ pāpitānīti tathā vaḍḍhanassevettha asambhavato. Tenāha ‘‘mahantānī’’ti. Bhattavaḍḍhitakanti bhuñjanabhājanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dinnabhattaṃ, ekāsane purisena bhuñjitabbabhattato upaḍḍhabhattanti attho.
「色想」是对色的想。具此想者,称为「色想者」;不具色想者,称为「无色想者」。这里是以想为首而说禅那。在此,令色想不生起,即是未能获得它。显示巴利原文
Rūpe saññā rūpasaññā, sā assa atthīti rūpasaññī, na rūpasaññī arūpasaññī, saññāsīsena jhānaṃ vadati. Rūpasaññāya anuppādanaṃ evettha alābhitā.
“外生”:指在外部所依处生起的。然而,在阿毗达摩中,由于四种胜处是这样被引述的:“内无色想者见外色,那些是小的、好色丑色的……乃至……无量的、好色丑色的”(《法集论》220),因此在《阿毗达摩注疏》中便提出了这样的质疑:“为什么不在所有四种胜处中,都像经中所说那样说‘内色想者一人见外色,那些是小的’等等,而在这里却都说‘内无色想’呢?”提出这一问题后,注疏解释原因说:“因为内色不能被征服。”进而说明:无论是在经里还是在论里,需要被征服的都只是外色,因此那些外色必须被明确地规定出来,所以两处都提到了它们。至于“内色想者”这一句,那只是世尊说法时的一种善巧变化而已。在这里,所有不带有颜色作意的小色和带有颜色作意的小色,都被称为“小好色丑色”;同样,无量的就被称为“无量的好色丑色”。这其中确有一个理趣:在征服了小色之后,如果那些色偶尔以颜色的角度被作意,这就被称为征服了“好色丑色”。因为经中的教导是带有理趣的说法。然而在阿毗达摩中,因为是究竟无余的教导,所以把带有颜色作意的和不带颜色作意的分开来说了。确实如此。显示巴利原文
Bahiddhāvauppannanti bahiddhā vatthusmiṃyeva uppannaṃ. Abhidhamme pana ‘‘ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni…pe… appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti (dha. sa. 220) evaṃ catunnaṃ abhibhāyatanānaṃ āgatattā abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 204) ‘‘kasmā pana ‘yathā suttante ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittānītiādi vuttaṃ, evaṃ avatvā idha catūsupi abhibhāyatanesu ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññitāva vuttā’ti codanaṃ katvā ‘ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyato’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā, tattha vā hi idha vā bahiddhā rūpāneva abhibhavitabbāni, tasmā tāni niyamato vattabbānīti tatrāpi idhāpi vuttāni. ‘Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’ti idaṃ pana satthu desanāvilāsamattamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca vaṇṇābhogarahitāni, sahitāni ca sabbāni parittāni ‘‘parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti vuttāni, tathā appamāṇāni ‘‘appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti. Atthi hi so pariyāyo parittāni abhibhuyya tāni ce kadāci vaṇṇavasena ābhujitāni honti, suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni abhibhuyyāti. Pariyāyakathā hi suttantadesanāti. Abhidhamme (dha. sa. 222) pana nippariyāyadesanattā vaṇṇābhogarahitāni visuṃ vuttāni, tathā sahitāni. Atthi hi ubhayattha abhibhavanavisesoti. Tathā idha pariyāyadesanattā vimokkhānampi abhibhavanapariyāyo atthīti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’tiādinā paṭhamadutiyaabhibhāyatanesu paṭhamavimokkho, tatiyacatutthaabhibhāyatanesu dutiyavimokkho, vaṇṇābhibhāyatanesu tatiyavimokkho ca abhibhavanappavattito saṅgahito. Abhidhamme pana nippariyāyadesanattā vimokkhābhibhāyatanāni asaṅkarato dassetuṃ vimokkhe vajjetvā abhibhāyatanāni kathitāni ; sabbāni ca vimokkhakiccāni jhānāni vimokkhadesanāyaṃ vuttāni. Tadetaṃ ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’ti āgatassa abhibhāyatanadvayassa abhidhamme abhibhāyatanesu avacanato ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnañca sabbavimokkhakiccasādhāraṇavacanabhāvato vavatthānaṃ katanti viññāyati. ‘‘Ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyato’’ti idaṃ katthacipi ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpāni passatī’’ti avatvā sabbattha yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti, tassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, tena yaṃ aññahetukaṃ, taṃ tena hetunā vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana desanāvilāsahetukaṃ ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññitāya eva abhidhamme (dha. sa. 223) vacanaṃ, na tassa aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ maggitabbanti dasseti. Ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyatā ca tesaṃ bahiddhā rūpānaṃ viya abhūtattā. Desanāvilāso ca yathāvuttavavatthānavasena veditabbo veneyyajjhāsayavasena vijjamānapariyāyakathābhāvato. ‘‘Suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti eteneva siddhattā na nīlādi abhibhāyatanāni vattabbānīti ce? Taṃ na, nīlādīsu katādhikārānaṃ nīlādibhāvasseva abhibhavanakāraṇattā. Na hi tesaṃ parisuddhāparisuddhavaṇṇānaṃ parittatā, appamāṇatā vā abhibhavanakāraṇaṃ, atha kho nīlādibhāvo evāti. Etesu ca parittādikasiṇarūpesu yaṃ yaṃ caritassa imāni abhibhāyatanāni ijjhanti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imesu panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“以总摄的方式”:指以整个青色的青颜色、青显色、青光耀的共同特征来把握。“以颜色的方式”:指以自性颜色的方式。“以显色的方式”:指以可见的方式,也就是在眼识等识的路线中能被执取的方式。“以光耀的方式”:指以它有光辉、能照耀的方式。“Umāpuppha”指亚麻花。因为没有颜色混杂,它纯粹就是青色。“Bārāṇasisambhava”指产于波罗奈。显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅgāhakavasenāti sakalanīlavaṇṇanīlanidassananīlanibhāsānaṃ sādhāraṇavasena. Vaṇṇavasenāti sabhāvavaṇṇavasena. Nidassanavasenāti passitabbatāvasena cakkhuviññāṇādiviññāṇavīthiyā gahetabbatāvasena. Obhāsavasenāti sappabhāsatāya avabhāsanavasena. Umāpupphanti atasipupphaṃ. Nīlameva hoti vaṇṇasaṅkarābhāvato. Bārāṇasisambhavanti bārāṇasiyaṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ.
对于某些外道来说,当他们观察无量的、极其广阔的遍相时,可能会生起恐惧:“此相岂不是征服、吞没了整个世界,将其抓住了吗?”然而如来却没有这种恐惧或畏缩。因此,引述这些胜处,只是为了显示如来无所畏惧的状态。显示巴利原文
Ekaccassa ito bāhirakassa appamāṇaṃ ativitthāritaṃ kasiṇanimittaṃ olokentassa bhayaṃ uppajjeyya ‘‘kiṃ nu kho idaṃ sakalaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā gaṇhātī’’ti, tathāgatassa pana tādisaṃ bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā natthīti abhītabhāvadassanatthameva ānītāni.
八解脱的注释显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhavimokkhavaṇṇanā
174 因为前文已从意义上作了详细分析,这里的意思便容易明白。对于某一类人,就连“解脱”这个名称也会带来恐惧,因为他们乐于耽著轮回。然而,如来即使已证入并安住于解脱,也完全没有这种畏惧。因此,举出这些解脱,只是为了显示如来无所畏惧的状态。显示巴利原文
174.Uttānatthāyeva heṭṭhā atthato vibhattattā. Ekaccassa vimokkhoti ghosopi bhayāvaho vaṭṭābhiratabhāvato, tathāgatassa pana vimokkhe upasampajja viharatopi taṃ natthīti abhītabhāvadassanatthameva ānītāni.
阿难请求的因缘故事的注释显示巴利原文
Ānandayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
178 “菩提”是指一切知智。由于一切知智的证得以四道智的证得为根本,因此将一切知智的证得说为“四道智的证得”。所谓“如此说过的状态”,是指“阿难,若如来愿意,可住世一劫或一劫有余”这样已宣说过的情况。显示巴利原文
178.Bodhīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘catumaggañāṇapaṭivedha’’ntveva vuttaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇappaṭivedhassa taṃmūlakattā. Evaṃ vuttabhāvanti ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno ānanda tathāgato kappaṃ vā tiṭṭheyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.166) evaṃ vuttabhāvaṃ.
179 那个粗显的相乃魔所造,由于他的心被魔缠缚,故而未能通达、也未能觉察那个相。显示巴利原文
179.Tampi oḷārikanimittaṃ kataṃ tassa mārena pariyuṭṭhitacetaso na paṭividdhaṃ na sallakkhitaṃ.
183 「等」字,指如是朋友、同僚、伙伴。因为应被喜爱,所以称为「可爱」;因为能令心增长,所以称为「可意」。「由出生」:由随顺出生之方式而别离。「异相」:指各自分离、不相系属的状态。「由死而分离」:因死亡而不再返回彼有身,故名为分离。「由有而异相」:因执取后有,而转异于原先之状,例如“欲界有情成为色界有情”等,乃至“人成为天人”等,也当如此类推。「何处可得?」意思是:在这五蕴相续之中,在何处、何种情形下,能获得“已经出生的……愿不坏灭”呢?因为不存在那样的原因,所以说「无有此事」。如此来看,即使是如来的身体也是稀有、未曾有法,更何况其他众生的身体呢?这是它的含义。「将舍弃它」这样的事也没有可能,因为已经令念现前,以智慧抉择而舍弃了寿行,而且佛所应作已经究竟。在这里,三个月之后便不再有可度化的众生。显示巴利原文
183.Ādikehīti evamādīhi mittāmaccasuhajjāhi. Piyāyitabbato piyehi. Manavaḍḍhanato manāpehi. Jātiyāti jātianurūpagamanena. Nānābhāvo visuṃbhāvo asambaddhabhāvo. Maraṇena vinābhāvoti cutiyā tenattabhāvena apunarāvattanato vippayogo. Bhavena aññathābhāvoti bhavantaraggahaṇena purimākārato aññākāratā ‘‘kāmāvacarasatto rūpāvacaro hotī’’tiādinā, tatthāpi ‘‘manusso devo hotī’’tiādināpi yojetabbo. Kutettha labbhāti kuto kuhiṃ kismiṃ nāma ṭhāne ettha etasmiṃ khandhappavatte ‘‘yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ…pe… mā palujjī’’ti laddhuṃ sakkā. Na sakkā eva tādisassa kāraṇassa abhāvatoti āha ‘‘netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti. Evaṃ acchariyabbhutadhammaṃ tathāgatassāpi sarīraṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana aññesanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Paccāvamissatī’’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā ñāṇena paricchinditvā āyusaṅkhārānaṃ ossaṭṭhattā, buddhakiccassa ca pariyosāpitattā. Na hettha māsattayato paraṃ buddhaveneyyā labbhantīti.
184 「教法的长久住立」,即指由纯粹圣道法及其所具备的种种资具,因此说:“一切皆依世间与出世间而说”,因为若没有世间的戒、定、慧,就不可能证得出世间法。显示巴利原文
184. Sāsanassa ciraṭṭhiti nāma sasambhārehi ariyamaggadhammehi kevalehīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ lokiyalokuttaravaseneva kathita’’nti lokiyāhi sīlasamādhipaññāhi vinā lokuttaradhammasamadhigamassa asambhavato.
象王回望的注释显示巴利原文
Nāgāpalokitavaṇṇanā
186 「象王回望」:意为如象王般回望,即类似象王回望的姿态。「触到」指接触到。「如同钩端」指如同钩子一般互相钩连、附着在一起而住立。「紧密相连」指彼此紧密地连接在一起。因此,由于颈骨像一整块般紧密相连,不仅颈骨,所有的骨头除了肩关节等十二个大关节以及手指关节之外,其余关节也都紧密相连地存在,正因如此,佛陀这些自然具足的身力有千亿象之力。他将身体转向面对毗舍离城的方向,就像为了避开刺丛而转向迦毗罗卫城时那样。既然如此,为什么还称它为「象王回望」呢?那是由于他当时的心意。世尊确实是以象王回望的方式想要回望,但凭借功德威力,他所站立的地方随之回转,因此,这才被称为「象王回望」。显示巴利原文
186.Nāgāpalokitanti nāgassa viya apalokitaṃ, hatthināgassa apalokanasadisaṃ apalokananti attho. Āhaccāti phusitvā. Aṅkusakalaggāni viyāti aṅkusakāni viya aññamaññasmiṃ laggāni āsattāni hutvā ṭhitāni. Ekābaddhānīti aññamaññaṃ ekato ābaddhāni. Tasmāti gīvaṭṭhīnaṃ ekagghanānaṃ viya ekābaddhabhāvena, na kevalaṃ gīvaṭṭhīnaṃyeva, atha kho sabbānipi tāni buddhānaṃ ṭhapetvā bāhusandhiādikā dvādasa mahāsandhiyo, aṅgulisandhiyo ca itarasandhīsu ekābaddhāni hutvā ṭhitāni, yato nesaṃ pakatihatthīnaṃ koṭisahassabalappamāṇaṃ kāyabalaṃ hoti. Vesālinagarābhimukhaṃ akāsi kaṇṭakaparivattane viya kapilanagarābhimukhaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ taṃ nāgāpalokitaṃ nāma jātaṃ? Tadajjhāsayaṃ upādāya. Bhagavā hi nāgāpalokitavaseneva apaloketukāmo jāto, puññānubhāvena panassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ parivatti, tena taṃ ‘‘nāgāpalokitaṃ’’ tveva vuccati.
“阿难,这是如来最后一次看毗舍离。”这句话并非出于对毗舍离的某种必然观察而说,因为理由不止一端,这仅是如实陈述。在宣说了清扫道路等道理之后,为了指出此处另有回望的原因,便说“难道不是……”等。这一切都只是最后的一眼——因为世尊渐次前往拘尸那罗而入般涅槃,所以便从这些地方逐一离去。借由“因非寻常”这句话,避免了将上述理由解释为单一的必然性,这仅是一种澄清。而为了显示此处真正无误的原因,又说“此外……”等。因为世尊并非出于对毗舍离的留恋而回望,而是以“此行不复返”的示现,为了利益众多人、安乐众多人、悲悯世间而回望。因此说:“此外,毗舍离的国王……”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idaṃ pacchimakaṃ ānanda tathāgatassa vesāliyā dassana’’nti nayidaṃ vesāliyā apalokanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ anekantikattā, bhūtakathanamattaṃ panetaṃ. Maggasodhanavasena taṃ dassetvā aññadevettha apalokanakāraṇaṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ pacchimadassanameva anukkamena kusināraṃ gantvā parinibbātukāmatāya tato tato nikkhantattā. ‘‘Anacchariyattā’’ti iminā yathāvuttaṃ anekantikattaṃ pariharati, tayidaṃ sodhanamattaṃ. Idaṃ panettha aviparītaṃ kāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na hi bhagavā sāpekkho vesāliṃ apalokesi, ‘‘idaṃ pana me gamanaṃ apunarāgamana’’nti dassanamukhena bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya apalokesi. Tenāha ‘‘apica vesālirājāno’’tiādi.
“终结者”:指于自他相续中,成为整个轮回之苦的破坏者、消灭者。因具足佛眼、法眼、天眼、肉眼与一切眼这五种眼,故称为有眼者。因连习气烦恼也已彻底断除,故以殊胜的烦恼般涅槃而称为般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Antakaroti sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa sakasantāne, parasantāne ca vināsakaro abhāvakaro. Buddhacakkhudhammacakkhudibbacakkhumaṃsacakkhusamantacakkhusaṅkhātehi pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā. Savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ samucchinnattā sātisayaṃ kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.
四大教法的注释显示巴利原文
Catumahāpadesavaṇṇanā
187 “大场所中”:即在广大场所之中,也就是那些安立正法的广大处所。在这些处所安立的法,能无有疑惑地被确定。那么,那些处所是什么呢?就是那些具备传承、摄于经教等方法之处。在第二种解释中,“教法依据”:指的是用来判断某人所说的“法”的依据——比如有人说:“贤友,这是我从世尊面前亲闻的……”等等。那是什么依据呢?就是如前所说,看它是否摄于经教等。既然如此,为何教法依据会有四种呢?因为法的传承有两位导师:佛陀与声闻弟子。而在声闻弟子中,又分为僧团、众多长老、一位长老三种方式。这样,以“你们从我处所受持的法”这种方式来指称的依据,由于所指的对象不同,便有了四种。因此经中说:“贤友,这是我从世尊面前亲闻的……”等等。正如《导论》中也这样说过:“有四大教法:以佛陀为教法依据、以僧团为教法依据、以众多长老为教法依据、以一位长老为教法依据。这些就是四大教法。”以佛陀为教法依据的,就称为佛教法依据;其余依此类推。因此说:“以佛陀等……乃至……大依据”。显示巴利原文
187.Mahāokāseti mahante okāse. Mahantāni dhammassa patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni. Yesu patiṭṭhāpito dhammo nicchīyati asandehato, kāni pana tāni? Āgamanavisiṭṭhāni suttotaraṇādīni. Dutiyavikappe apadisantīti apadesā, ‘‘sammukhā metaṃ āvuso bhagavato suta’’ntiādinā kenaci ābhatassa ‘‘dhammo’’ti vinicchinane kāraṇaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Tassa yathābhatassa suttotaraṇādi eva. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ cattāroti? Yasmā dhammassa dve samparāyā satthā, sāvakā ca, tesu ca sāvakā saṅghagaṇapuggalavasena tividhā , evaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ mayā yaṃ dhammo paṭiggahito’’ti apadisitabbānaṃ bhedena cattāro. Tenāha ‘‘sammukhā me taṃ āvuso bhagavato suta’’ntiādi. Tathā ca vuttaṃ nettiyaṃ ‘‘cattāro mahāpadesā buddhāpadeso saṅghāpadeso sambahulattherāpadeso ekattherāpadeso. Ime cattāro mahāpadesā’’ti (netti. 18) buddho apadeso etassāti buddhāpadeso. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tenāha ‘‘buddhādayo…pe… mahākāraṇānī’’ti.
188 “不应欢喜”,是指不应接受。所谓接受一部著作,就是听闻它,因此说“不应听闻”。“词与音节”,即词与音节,意思是义理之词与音节之词。所谓“词”,指义理通过这些而得以表达,其中字母等是音节之词;由于需要被表达,能作陈述等的义理之词也称为“词”。然而在注释书中,有人说:“‘所谓以词为体的音节’只是指音节之词”,这种说法并不正确。因为能表达意义的称为音节,即音节之词;而由它们所表达的对象也称为音节,即义理之词,这样才概括了两个方面。“在此处”,指在那人所带来经文的这个地方。“诵出了圣典”,指纯粹诵出了巴利语的法句。“说出了义理”,指诵出圣典后,陈述解释了它的含义。“说明了连结”,指说明了已开始的教导与后面教导之间的贯通关系,也就是说明了其中的关联。“说明了前后关系”……显示巴利原文
188.Nevaabhinanditabbanti na sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Ganthassa sampaṭicchanaṃ nāma savananti āha ‘‘na sotabba’’nti. Padabyañjanānīti padāni ca byañjanāni ca, atthapadāni, byañjanapadāni cāti attho. Pajjati attho etehīti padāni, akkharādīni byañjanapadāni. Pajjitabbato padāni, saṅkāsanādīni atthapadāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘‘padasaṅkhātāni byañjanānī’ti byañjanapadāneva vuttānī’’ti keci, taṃ na, atthaṃ byañjentīti byañjanāni, byañjanapadāni, tehi byañjitabbato byañjanāni, atthapadānīti ubhayasaṅgahato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti tenābhatasuttassa imasmiṃ padese. Pāḷi vuttāti kevalo pāḷidhammo pavatto. Attho vuttoti pāḷiyā attho pavatto niddiṭṭho. Anusandhi kathitoti yathāraddhadesanāya, upari desanāya ca anusandhānaṃ kathitaṃ sambandho kathito . Pubbāparaṃ kathitanti pubbenāparaṃ avirujjhanañceva visesādhānañca kathitaṃ pakāsitaṃ. Evaṃ pāḷidhammādīni sammadeva sallakkhetvā gahaṇaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahaṇanti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu gahetvā’’ti. Sutte otāretabbānīti ñāṇena sutte ogāhetvā tāretabbāni, taṃ pana ogāhetvā taraṇaṃ tattha otaraṇaṃ anuppavesanaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutte otāretabbānī’’ti. Saṃsandetvā dassanaṃ sandassananti āha ‘‘vinaye saṃsandetabbānī’’ti.
然而,什么是那部经?什么是那部律?为了通过老师们观点的分歧来阐明这个含义,而说了“在此处……”等。“律”,这里指分别篇章。因为它能指示那名为“本母”的经的含义,所以具备被称为“经”的资格。由于具有种种理趣和殊胜的理趣,它也叫作律,即犍度篇章。“就这样”,是指当这样去把握经和律时,连律藏也还没有完全包含,因为附随篇章尚未被收摄在内。或者,也可以将经藏和论藏作为“经”,因为它们同样可能具备指示含义等意思。“就算这样”,即按“经藏和论藏是经,律藏是律”来区分经和律。“也还没有穷尽”,意思是还没有毫无遗漏地完全包含。为什么呢?回答说:“因为有不叫作经的……”。意思是,有些佛语,比如《本生》等,虽然被结集了,但并没有被冠以“经”的名称,因此按刚才所说的方式,三藏并没有被完全包括。而像《经集》《优陀那》《如是语》等,并不像《长部》那样冠以经名来结集,所以在此处的意图中,它们连同《本生》等都被包含进去了。至于这……显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana taṃ suttaṃ, ko vā vinayoti vicāraṇāya ācariyānaṃ matibhedamukhena tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vinayoti vibhaṅgapāṭhamāha. So hi mātikāsaññitassa suttassa atthasūcanato ‘‘sutta’’nti vattabbataṃ arahati. Vividhanayattā, visiṭṭhanayattā ca vinayo, khandhakapāṭho. Evanti evaṃ suttavinayesu pariggayhamānesu vinayapiṭakampi na pariyādīyati parivārapāḷiyā asaṅgahitattā. Suttantābhidhammapiṭakāni vā suttaṃ atthasūcanādiatthasambhavato. Evampīti ‘‘suttantābhidhammapiṭakāni suttaṃ, vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayo’’ti evaṃ suttavinayavibhāge vuccamānepi. Na tāva pariyādīyantīti na tāva anavasesato pariggayhanti, kasmāti āha ‘‘asuttanāmakañhī’’tiādi. Yasmā ‘‘sutta’’nti imaṃ nāmaṃ anāropetvā saṅgītampi jātakādibuddhavacanaṃ atthi, tasmā vuttanayena tīṇi piṭakāni na pariyādiṇṇānīti. Suttanipātaudānaitivuttakādīni dīghanikāyādayo viya suttanāmaṃ āropetvā asaṅgītānīti adhippāye panettha jātakādīhi saddhiṃ tānipi gahitāni. Buddhavaṃsacariyāpiṭakānaṃ panettha aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ maggitabbaṃ, kiṃ vā tena magganena? Sabbopāyaṃ vaṇṇanānayo theravādaṃ dassanamukhena paṭikkhitto evāti.
“存在”,什么存在呢?这是表明,不名为“经”的佛语是不存在的。正如在《因缘注释》中(《长部义注》·第一结集讲释;《精义宝函》·第一结集讲释)我们曾经说过:“‘经’是总称,其他的是别称。”那部注释在驳斥了所有其他说法之后,以“经就是律……”等所建立的注释理路,被厘清为“这个含义在此处并非被认同”。然后说:“然而律是原因”:以此调伏烦恼,因此称为律,也就是调伏烦恼的方法。而这个律能作此事,所以它是原因,因此说“律是原因”。显示巴利原文
Atthīti kiṃ atthi, asuttanāmakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ natthi evāti dasseti. Tathā hi nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) amhehi vuttaṃ ‘‘suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare’’ti. Taṃ sabbaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘suttanti vinayo’’tiādinā vuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayaṃ ‘‘nāyamattho idhādhippeto’’ti paṭisodhetvā. Vineti etena kileseti vinayo, kilesavinayanūpāyo, so eva ca naṃ karotīti kāraṇanti āha ‘‘vinayo pana kāraṇa’’nti.
“法”(dhammeti):指教法。“为了有贪”(sarāgāyāti):为了有贪的状态,令欲贪与有贪增长。“为了结缚”(saññogāyāti):为了有的结缚。“为了积集”(ācayāyāti):为了令轮回增长。“为了多欲”(mahicchatāyāti):为了多欲的状态。“为了不知足”(asantuṭṭhiyāti):为了不知足的状态。“为了杂闹”(saṅgaṇikāyāti):为了与烦恼众、人群众共住。“为了懈怠”(kosajjāyāti):为了懈怠的状态。“为了难养”(dubbharatāyāti):为了难养的状态。“为了离欲”(virāgāyāti):为了从整个轮回离染。“为了离结”(visaññogāyāti):为了从欲有等脱离。“为了损减”(apacayāyāti):为了损减一切轮回,也就是为了涅槃。“为了少欲”(appicchatāyāti):通过资具少欲等方式,彻底断除欲求。显示巴利原文
Dhammeti pariyattidhamme. Sarāgāyāti sarāgabhāvāya kāmarāgabhavarāgaparibrūhanāya. Saññogāyāti bhavasaṃyojanāya. Ācayāyāti vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanatthāya. Mahicchatāyāti mahicchabhāvāya. Asantuṭṭhiyāti asantuṭṭhibhāvāya. Saṅgaṇikāyāti kilesasaṅgaṇagaṇasaṅgaṇavihārāya. Kosajjāyāti kusītabhāvāya. Dubbharatāyāti dupposatāya. Virāgāyāti sakalavaṭṭato virajjanatthāya. Visaññogāyāti kāmabhavādīhi visaṃyujjanatthāya. Apacayāyāti sabbassāpi vaṭṭassa apacayanāya, nibbānāyāti attho. Appicchatāyāti paccayappicchatādivasena sabbaso icchāpagamāya. Santuṭṭhiyāti dvādasavidhasantuṭṭhibhāvāya. Pavivekāyāti pavivittabhāvāya, kāyavivekāditadaṅgavivekādivivekasiddhiyā. Vīriyārambhāyāti kāyikassa ceva, cetasikassa ca vīriyassa paggahaṇatthāya. Subharatāyāti sukhaposanatthāya. Evaṃ yo pariyattidhammo uggahaṇadhāraṇaparipucchāmanasikāravasena yoniso paṭipajjantassa sarāgādibhāvaparivajjanassa kāraṇaṃ hutvā virāgādibhāvāya saṃvattati, ekaṃsato eso dhammo. Eso vinayo, sammadeva apāyādīsu apatanavasena dhāraṇato, kilesānaṃ vinayanato, satthu sammāsambuddhassa ovādānusiṭṭhibhāvato etaṃ satthusāsananti dhāreyyāsi jāneyyāsi, avabujjheyyāsīti attho. Catusaccassa sūcanaṃ suttanti āha ‘‘sutteti tepiṭake buddhavacane’’ti. Tepiṭakañhi buddhavacanaṃ saccavinimuttaṃ natthi. Rāgādivinayanakāraṇaṃ tathāgatena suttapadena pakāsitanti āha ‘‘vinayeti etasmiṃ rāgādivinayakāraṇe’’ti.
这里所说的“摄受于经”(sutte osaraṇaṃ),只应理解为被包含在三藏佛语之中,而非其他方式,因此说“未以经的编次在任何地方出现”(suttapaṭipāṭiyā katthaci anāgantvā)。譬如刮起树皮:如同健康的大树正在生长时,通过某种方式把树皮、碎片或外皮刮起来;同样地,正当健康的教法安立之时,仅凭某些字句,便好像它们已包含在教法中一般,把如同树皮的前后矛盾等过失刮起来、暴露出来。然而,那些确实属于《密藏》《韦桑答罗》(毗输安多罗)等范畴的内容则不是这样,因此说“密藏韦桑答罗……可见的含义”(guḷhavessantara…pe…paññāyantīti attho)。“在调伏贪等中”(rāgādivinaye):指为了调伏贪等的目的。由于不具备那种正确的特征,因此那些不被看见、不显现的,就应该舍掉、远离、不采纳。“在所有情形中”(sabbattha):指在所有的情况下。显示巴利原文
Sutte osaraṇañcettha tepiṭake buddhavacane pariyāpannatāvaseneva veditabbaṃ, na aññathāti āha ‘‘suttapaṭipāṭiyā katthaci anāgantvā’’ti. Challiṃ uṭṭhapetvāti arogassa mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato upakkamena challiyā sakalikāya, papaṭikāya vā uṭṭhapanaṃ viya arogassa sāsanadhammassa tiṭṭhato byañjanamattena tappariyāpannaṃ viya hutvā challisadisaṃ pubbāparaviruddhatādidosaṃ uṭṭhapetvā paridīpetvā, tādisāni pana ekaṃsato guḷhavessantarādipariyāpannāni hontīti āha ‘‘guḷhavessantara…pe…paññāyantīti attho’’ti . Rāgādivinayeti rāgādīnaṃ vinayanatthe. Tadākāratāya na paññāyamānāni na dissamānāni chaḍḍetabbāni vajjitabbāni na gahetabbāni. Sabbatthāti sabbavāresu.
“而在此处”(imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne):指在这四大教法(mahāpadesa)解说的场合。虽然“经中有四大教法”等之前已经说过,但现在结合未说的部分,以杂谈的方式列出纲目。欲知的义理即是“问”(pañho),对其的解答即是“问之解答”(pañhābyākaraṇāni)。以指示义理等为用的,即是“经”(suttaṃ),也就是圣典;随顺此经者,则称为“随顺经”(suttānulomaṃ),也就是大教法。“阿阇梨说”(ācariyavādo):指诸师依之解说、注释圣典,也就是注疏。“己意”(attanomati):指某位长老自己的见解和心意。当须抉择法、判断法的时候,这些就是刚才所说的四大教法。依之而衡量法、判别法的,称为“量”(pamāṇaṃ)。因此说“凡在那里相契合的……”(yaṃ ettha sametītiādi)等。“若不如此”(itaranti):指不契合于大教法的。“又若不如此”(puna itaranti):是就将非开许错会为开许而言。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃpana ṭhāneti imasmiṃ mahāpadesaniddesaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sutte cattāro mahāpadesā’’tiādinā vuttampi avuttena saddhiṃ gahetvā pakiṇṇakakathāya mātikaṃ uddisati. Ñātuṃ icchito attho pañho, tassa vissajjanāni pañhābyākaraṇāni, atthasūcanādiatthena suttaṃ, pāḷi, taṃ suttaṃ anulometi anukūletīti suttānulomaṃ, mahāpadeso. Ācariyā vadanti saṃvaṇṇenti pāḷiṃ etenāti ācariyavādo aṭṭhakathā. Tassa tassa therassa attano eva mati adhippāyoti attanomati. Dhammavinicchaye patteti dhamme vinicchinitabbe upaṭṭhite. Imeti anantaraṃ vuttā cattāro mahāpadesā. Pamīyati dhammo paricchijjati vinicchīyati etenāti pamāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ ettha sametī’’tiādi. Itaranti mahāpadesesu asamentaṃ. Puna itaranti akappiyaṃ anulomentaṃ kappiyaṃ paṭibāhantaṃ sandhāyāha.
应决定地解答、应对的,即是「决定说问答」(ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo)。「分别说」(vibhajjāti):将所问的义理以确定等方式分别后解答。「反问说」(paṭipucchāti):反问提问者后再解答。「应置」(ṭhapanīyoti):指不以这三种方式解答,因此应搁置不作答,不作解答而放置。对于“眼是无常的”这一问题,若针对下分句的确定,说“应决定地解答”,因为那里没有丝毫恒常性的可能。若针对上分句的确定,则成为应分别解答的,因为眼与耳在特殊义与共义上并不共通。对于“如同眼,耳也是无常吗?”这样的诘问,应以反问方式,以遮止与容许来解答,因此说「如同眼,耳也是……这是一个应反问解答的问题」(yathā cakkhu, tathā sotaṃ…pe… ayaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho)。“命即是身”这一问题,是关于命与身没有差别的问难。凡是被“此与此无异”所诘问的对象,在究竟义上根本不成立,犹如谈论显示巴利原文
Ekaṃseneva byākātabbo vissajjetabboti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo. Vibhajjāti pucchitamatthaṃ avadhāraṇādibhedena vibhajitvā. Paṭipucchāti pucchantaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā. Ṭhapanīyoti tidhāpi avissajjanīyattā ṭhapanīyo byākaraṇaṃ akatvā ṭhapetabbo. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ anicca’’nti pañhe uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃseneva byākātabba’’nti vuttaṃ niccatāya lesassāpi tattha abhāvato. Purimapadāvadhāraṇe pana vibhajjabyākaraṇīyatā cakkhusotesu visesatthasāmaññatthānaṃ asādhāraṇabhāvato. Dvinnaṃ tesaṃ sadisatācodanā paṭipucchanamukheneva byākaraṇīyā paṭikkhepavasena, anuññātavasena ca vissajjitabbatoti āha ‘‘yathā cakkhu, tathā sotaṃ…pe… ayaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho’’ti. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti jīvasarīrānaṃ anaññatāpañho. Yassa yena anaññatācoditā, so eva paramatthato nupalabbhatīti vañjhātanayassa matteyyatākittanasadisoti abyākātabbatāya ṭhapanīyo vuttoti. Imāni cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni pamāṇaṃ teneva nayena tesaṃ pañhānaṃ byākātabbato.
「律藏大教法」:由于它依循开许、随顺的方式来安排,所以从直接的意义上称为“随顺开许”。而在经藏的大教法中,因为这种大教法的性质和它相似,所以注疏也沿用了“随顺开许”这个用语。世尊在各个地方开示的各种教说,本身就是注疏;不过,结集法藏的长老们先把三藏结集起来,然后依照对法义的注释,确立了传诵的次第,因此这些教说就被称为“「阿阇梨说」”,意思是:老师们(阿阇梨)依此来解说、注释圣典(巴利语)。所以才有“阿阇梨说就是指注疏”这句话。在三回结集中被诵出的、作为佛语义释的论说传承,是由玛欣德长老带到铜鍱岛(锡兰岛)的,后来铜鍱岛的大长老们为了避免混入其他部派的见解,才用狮子国(锡兰)的语言把它记录下来。「己意」指的就是上座部(theravādo)本身的传承。「以理趣摄持」(nayaggāhenāti):意思是从经教等当中所获得的理趣来统摄把握。「以随慧」(anubuddhiyāti):意思是纯粹依循经教等而产生的智慧。「自己的辩才」(attano paṭibhānanti):意思是对于那个义理,依照已经说过的理趣,自己在心中自然呈显出来;这样呈显出来的义理,就如实地被说出来。「只应接受契合的」(samentameva gahetabbanti):这句话显示,只要和经典相合,就应当如此从大教法中提取义理。由于文字上的疏漏,阿阇梨说有时也可能出现和经典不相应的情况,那种就不应该接受;为了说明这一点,才说“阿阇梨说也应当只接受和经典相契合的部分”。自己的辩才,因为是依凭补特伽罗个人而产生的,所以力量最薄弱。即便如此,它如果和经典相合,也可以接受。「在那里」(tāsūti):是指在三次结集中。「唯有在结集中所传承下来的才是准绳」(āgatameva pamāṇaṃ):这句话表明,只有由大迦叶等大长老们所结集的,才是这里所指的“经”,从而否定了其他自称为“经”的东西。因为这三回结集,正是为了确立这经藏的意义。「那里」(tatthāti):指的是那些应受呵责的伪经。应当知道,那些“既不被摄入经中,也不与律相应”的说法,因为它根本就不是佛经,所以这里用总结的方式表明:“随顺开许,只应接受和经典相契合的”就是这个意思。在所有这些地方,“不是其余”(na itara)这句话,应看作是在表明,每一处对取舍的确定,都有其明确的成果。显示巴利原文
Vinayamahāpadeso kappiyānulomavidhānato nippariyāyato anulomakappiyaṃ nāma, mahāpadesabhāvena pana taṃsadisatāya suttantamahāpadesesupi ‘‘anulomakappiya’’nti ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāvohāro. Yadipi tattha tattha bhagavatā pavattitapakiṇṇakadesanāva aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthavaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ‘‘ācariyavādo’’ti vuccati ācariyā vadanti saṃvaṇṇenti pāḷiṃ etenāti. Tenāha ‘‘ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā’’ti. Tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷho eva ca buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo mahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ ābhato pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ. Attanomati nāma theravādo. Nayaggāhenāti suttādito labbhamānanayaggahaṇena. Anubuddhiyāti suttādīniyeva anugatabuddhiyā. Attano paṭibhānanti attano eva tassa atthassa vuttanayena upaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāupaṭṭhitā atthā eva tathā vuttā. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā suttena saṃsandati, evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci pāḷiyā asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha ‘‘ācariyavādopi suttena samentoyevagahetabbo’’ti. Sabbadubbalā puggalassa sayaṃ paṭibhānabhāvato. Tathā ca sāpi gahetabbā, kīdisī? Suttena samentā yevāti yojanā. Tāsūti tīsu saṅgītīsu. ‘‘Āgatameva pamāṇa’’nti iminā mahākassapādīhi saṅgītameva ‘‘sutta’’nti idhādhippetanti tadaññassa suttabhāvameva paṭikkhipati. Tadatthā eva hi tisso saṅgītiyo. Tatthāti gārayhasutte. Na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissantīti veditabbāni tassa asuttabhāvato tena ‘‘anulomakappiyaṃ suttena samentameva gahetabba’’nti vuttaṃ evatthaṃ nigamanavasena nidasseti. Sabbattha ‘‘na itara’’nti vacanaṃ tattha tattha gahitāvadhāraṇaphaladassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
铁匠之子准陀事的注释显示巴利原文
Kammāraputtacundavatthuvaṇṇanā
189 「猪肉」(sūkaramaddavanti):指野猪的嫩肉。因准陀是入流圣弟子,且为世尊及比丘僧团备办饮食者,只备办无过失的食物,故称此为“自然肉”(pavattamaṃsaṃ)。据说,那是——如“非太幼者”等经文所述的——一种具特殊品质的肉。正因如此,经中形容它“柔软而嫩滑”。因为是嫩肉,又经特别调理,故称“maddava”(软嫩之食)。他们投入营养精华(ojaṃ pakkhipiṃsu),是怀着“这是世尊最后一餐”的殊胜功德想;如此投入后,由于具有了天界营养精华,食物便变得比原来更重了。显示巴利原文
189.Sūkaramaddavanti vanavarāhassa mudumaṃsaṃ. Yasmā cundo ariyasāvako sotāpanno, aññe ca bhagavato, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca āhāraṃ paṭiyādentā anavajjameva paṭiyādenti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pavattamaṃsa’’nti. Taṃ kirāti ‘‘nātitaruṇassā’’tiādinā vuttavisesaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘mudu ceva siniddhañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mudumaṃsabhāvato hi abhisaṅkharaṇavisesena ca ‘‘maddava’’nti vuttaṃ. Ojaṃ pakkhipiṃsu ‘‘ayaṃ bhagavato pacchimako āhāro’’ti puññavisesāpekkhāya, taṃ pana tathāpakkhittadibbojatāya garutaraṃ jātaṃ.
其他人若不知此食难以消化,或许会毁谤道:“他不曾施与任何人,就这样将它毁坏糟蹋了。”为消除这种来自他人的毁谤,世尊才发出“我并没有……”这样的狮子吼。显示巴利原文
Aññe yaṃ dujjīraṃ, taṃ ajānantā ‘‘kassaci adatvā vināsita’’nti upavadeyyunti parūpavādamocanatthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘nāhaṃ ta’’ntiādinā sīhanādaṃ nadati.
190 然而,这狮子吼难道不就意味着,那食物在世尊体内也未善消化吗?不应作如是观,因为说“那食物在世尊体内确实完美消化了”才是恰当的:既未因此食物而生起不适的变异,且由其他原因所引生的疾病反而变得轻微。由此说“并非因为吃了……”等。世尊及其他漏尽者并非以生起新受的方式受用食物;他们受用食物时,只将其转化为具足八支的状态。若果然如此,又为何经中说“饭后,他生起了剧烈的疾病”等呢?那是由于疾病恰好在用餐后生起,才作如此表述。然而,在义注中已说明了“并非因为进食那餐饭所引起”的道理。当过去已造作、累积并已得现形之缘的业力引生极猛利的疾病时,以那油润嫩滑的食物为缘,反而起到了抑制苦受的效果,故说“因为如果……”等。“在所期望的地方”(patthitaṭṭhāneti):即所愿往之处。而他欲往的意愿,应理解为是希望到那里去调伏堪受调伏的众生。在偈颂中,使用“听说”(sutaṃ)一词,是为了显示:这仅是传闻,只是旁人之语;牟尼(世尊)并显示巴利原文
190. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ sīhanādo nanu taṃ bhagavatopi sammāpariṇāmaṃ na gatanti? Nayidaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, yasmā ‘‘sammadeva taṃ bhagavato pariṇāmaṃ gata’’nti vattuṃ arahati tappaccayā uppannassa vikārassa abhāvato, aññapaccayassa ca vikārassa mudubhāvaṃ āpāditattā. Tenāha ‘‘na pana bhuttappaccayā’’tiādi. Na hi bhagavā, aññe vā pana khīṇāsavā navavedanuppādanavasena āhāraṃ paribhuñjanti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatameva katvā āhārassa upabhuñjanato. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bhattaṃ bhuttāvissa kharo ābādho uppajjī’’tiādi vuttaṃ? Taṃ bhojanuttarakālaṃ uppannattā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na pana bhuttapaccayā’’ti vutto vāyamattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Katupacitassa laddhokāsassa kammassa vasena balavatipi roge uppanne garusiniddhabhojanappaccayā vedanāniggaho jāto, tenāha ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādi. Patthitaṭṭhāneti icchitaṭṭhāne, icchā cassa tattha gantvā vinetabbaveneyyāpekkhā daṭṭhabbā. Gāthāyampi ‘‘suta’’nti iminā sutamattaṃ, paresaṃ vacanamattametaṃ, na pana bhojanappaccayā ābādhaṃ phusi dhīroti dasseti.
取水的注释显示巴利原文
Pānīyāharaṇavaṇṇanā
191 由水的清净相,可知其澄澈,故说“有清净水”(acchodakā),即指有澄净的清水。水的味道甘美怡神,令人愉悦,故说“有甘甜水”(madhurodakā)。其水既浅且特别清凉,而非深水,故说“水浅而清凉”(tanusītalasalilā)。“无泥泞”(nikkaddamā)说明了水色洁白的原因。若混杂泥淖、淤泥等杂物,水便会变色;然就其本性,水本是白净的。显示巴利原文
191. Pasannabhāvena udakassa acchabhāvo veditabboti āha ‘‘acchodakāti pasannodakā’’ti. Sādurasattā sātatāti āha ‘‘madhurodakā’’ti. Tanukameva salilaṃ visesato sītalaṃ, na bahalanti āha ‘‘tanusītalasalilā’’ti. Nikkaddamāti setabhāvassa kāraṇamāha. Paṅkacikkhallādivasena hi udakassa vivaṇṇatā, sabhāvato pana taṃ setavaṇṇaṃ evāti.
弗居娑(马胜子)事的注释显示巴利原文
Pukkusamallaputtavatthuvaṇṇanā
192 「迎面风」:指迎面吹来的风。「长而褐眼」:指此人身材高大,且生有黄褐色的眼睛。正因为他生有黄褐色的眼睛,所以大家称他为“阿罗罗”。「如是者」:意指照着所见的样子去行事、去成为,即那般的情形。「于如是等」:则用在出现这类不变词组合的任何地方。显示巴利原文
192.Dhuravāteti paṭimukhavāte. Dīghapiṅgaloti dīgho hutvā piṅgalacakkhuko. Piṅgalakkhiko hi so ‘‘āḷāro’’ti paññāyittha. Evarūpanti dakkhati karissati bhavissatīti īdisaṃ. Īdisesūti yatra yaṃcāti evarūpanipātasaddayuttaṭṭhānesu.
193 「游走」:指闪电犹如从云层中迸发而出,四处游走,因此有“放出即游走”之说。「九种」:指九种不同的类别。因为在九种类别中,即使其中某一种闪电也归摄在内,所以通称为“九种”。这是一种通行的习惯说法,如同“证得八解脱者”这一称呼一样。闪电能令人丧失知觉——凡被其巨响与光焰所覆盖者,皆致如此。「一轮」:指一个完整的圆圈。「切割者」:因闪电如切碎垃圾般将其割裂,故得此名。「发出伽伽声」:指它制造出“伽伽”的声响,这是形容它的回响。「猴头状」:指其形状犹如猴头。「鱼跃状」:指如同鱼在水中跳跃翻腾,呈现出纷乱的形态。「鸡形」:指如同张开翅膀的鸡的形状。农夫犁地时,手握之处有犁柄上的一个圆球,因此犁被称为“有柄球者”,故「柄球状」即类似那种形状,由此而有「如犁状」的说法。而巨大的闪电本身炽热如火,纵使天降大雨,雨水也打不湿它,故称「干闪电」,由此而有“击碎所落之处”的说法。显示巴利原文
193. Vicarantiyo meghagabbhato niccharantiyo viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘niccharantīsūti vicarantīsū’’ti. Navavidhāyāti navappakārāya. Navasu hi pakāresu ekavidhāpi asani tappariyāpannatāya ‘‘navavidhā’’ tveva vuccati. Īdisī hi esā ruḷhi aṭṭhavimokkhapattipi samaññā viya. Asaññaṃ karoti, yo tassā saddena , tejasā ca ajjhotthaṭo. Ekaṃ cakkanti ekaṃ maṇḍalaṃ. Saṅkāraṃ tīrentī paricchijjantī viya dassetīti saterā. Gaggarāyamānāti gaggarātisaddaṃ karontī, anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Kapisīsāti kapisīsākāravatī. Macchavilolikāti udake paripphandamānamaccho viya viluḷitākārā. Kukkuṭasadisāti pasāritapakkhakukkuṭākārā. Naṅgalassa kassanakāle kassakānaṃ hatthena gahetabbaṭṭhāne maṇikā hoti, taṃ upādāya naṅgalaṃ ‘‘daṇḍamaṇikā’’ti vuccati, tasmā daṇḍamaṇikākārā daṇḍamaṇikā. Tenāha ‘‘naṅgalasadisā’’ti. Deve vassantepi sajotibhūtatāya udakena atemetabbato mahāsani ‘‘sukkhāsanī’’ti vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘patitaṭṭhānaṃ samugghāṭetī’’ti.
「谷壳屋」:指脱粒时所用的小屋。据说,那里有一大堆稻草,人们把内部的稻草掏出来,修建了一处类似大厅、适于沙门居住的地方,世尊当时便住在那里。又因那片打谷场宛如大厅,故称「于打谷大厅」。「于此」是表示原因的处格,因此说「由此因」,意指因闪电击倒车匿等人而成为原因。至于「你,尊者」,便是原文的这般读法。显示巴利原文
Bhusāgāraketi bhusamaye agārake. Tattha kira mahantaṃ palālapuñjaṃ abbhantarato palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā sālāsadisaṃ pabbajitānaṃ vasanayoggaṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ, tadā bhagavā tattha vasi, taṃ pana khalamaṇḍalaṃ sālāsadisanti āha ‘‘khalasālāya’’nti. Etthāti hetumhi bhummavacananti āha ‘‘etasmiṃ kāraṇe’’ti, asanipātena channaṃ janānaṃ hatakāraṇeti attho. So tvaṃ bhanteti ayameva vā pāṭho.
194 据说,名为「金精」的,是佛陀那最上等、极其光辉的肤色光芒,如同从天上带来的黄金,因此才有「金精般的金色」之说。接着,他自设问答:“那位长老拿了那块布吗?”在说明其中缘由时,开示了“虽则”以下的内容。所谓“以此原因”,指的是达到作为侍者的顶峰、遮止他人的议论、以这块布供养导师,以及随顺导师的心意——正是由于这四种原因。显示巴利原文
194. Siṅgī nāma kira uttamaṃ ativiya pabhassaraṃ buddhānaṃ chavivaṇṇobhāsaṃ devalokato āgatasuvaṇṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘siṅgīsuvaṇṇavaṇṇa’’nti. ‘‘Kiṃ pana thero taṃ gaṇhī’’ti sayameva pucchaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā tattha kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādimāha. Teneva kāraṇenāti upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānassa matthakappatti, paresaṃ vacanokāsapacchedanaṃ, tena vatthena satthu pūjanaṃ, satthu ajjhāsayānuvattananti iminā teneva yathāvuttena catubbidhena kāraṇena.
195 长老随即把那块金色细软布呈献给世尊,说:“尊者,愿世尊接受我这块细布,这将为我带来长久的利益与安乐。”世尊接受后,便使用了它。因此经中说:“世尊取一件作下衣,一件作上衣。”据说,比丘们当时仅仅将布料边缘缝好,便完成了裁缝工作,交给长老,长老再呈献给世尊。“如同被拍灭的灯”,意思是光亮被遮住了,这里的“如同”只是一个不变化词。实际上,因为那两件衣的光彩被世尊身光完全压覆,所以它们本身的光辉便无法显现。“只在内部”,是指在里面、内部的意思。因此才说“但它的外表没有光”。显示巴利原文
195. Thero ca tāvadeva taṃ siṅgīvaṇṇaṃ maṭṭhadussaṃ bhagavato upanāmesi ‘‘paṭiggaṇhatu me bhante bhagavā imaṃ maṭṭhadussaṃ, taṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti. Paṭiggahesi bhagavā, paṭiggahetvāva naṃ paribhuñji . Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāpi tato ekaṃ nivāsesi, ekaṃ pārupī’’ti. Tāvadeva kira taṃ bhikkhū ovaṭṭikaraṇamattena tunnakammaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā therassa upanesuṃ, thero bhagavato upanāmesi. Hataccikaṃ viyāti paṭihatappabhaṃ, viya-saddo nipātamattaṃ. Bhagavato hi sarīrappabhāhi abhibhuyyamānā tassa vatthayugassa pabhassaratā nāhosi. Antantenevāti anto anto eva, abbhantarato evāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘bahipanassa pabhā natthī’’ti.
「产生清净的形态」这句,点明了这样的含义:他食用这些食物后,并非因此引发那种疾病。这种情况只在两个时机发生,因为只有在证得两种涅槃界时才会如此。关于“在娑罗双树中间”等句,将在后面详细解释。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pasannarūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti etenetassa āhārassa bhuttappaccayā na so rogoti ayamattho dīpito. Dvīsu kālesu evaṃ hoti dvinnaṃ nibbānadhātūnaṃ samadhigamasamayabhāvato. Upavattane antarena yamakasālānanti ettha vattabbaṃ parato āgamissati.
196 (那块布)全然呈现为金色,这是因为世尊那极为清净、光明赫奕、浑然一体的身光,无有间隙地彻底辉映、遍覆所致。显示巴利原文
196.Sabbaṃsuvaṇṇavaṇṇameva ahosi ativiya parisuddhāya pabhassarāya ekagghanāya bhagavato sarīrappabhāya nirantaraṃ abhibhūtattā.
「于法」是指在教理之法上。「转起」是指作为圣典而开示。而他之所以「坐在前面」,是为了酬答教示之恩。显示巴利原文
Dhammeti pariyattidhamme. Pavattāti pāvacanabhāvena desetā. Puratova nisīdi ovādappaṭikaraṇabhāvato.
197 所谓「布施利益为名的利得」,是指诸如容色施、力量施等各别类型的、称为布施利益的「现法利益」与「后世利益」,这些都是应当希求的利得。而「那些无利得」,是说那些对你来说全都不是利得,根本不成其为利得。「现法」,是指现世、能现前亲证的,也就是就在此生、就在当下的这个自体中产生的利益。「后世」,是因为死后要前往他世,故将他世称为「后世」,也就是在他世产生的利益。此「现法利益」与「后世利益」合在一起,便称为「现法后世利益」。「布施利益为名的利得」,即指由布施利益所构成的利得。「同等果」是说这些(团食布施)的果报全然平等,无有差异,而非一部分平等,故称为同等果。此处「团食」,特指以团食为所缘的布施所生的福德。显示巴利原文
197.Dānānisaṃsasaṅkhātālābhāti vaṇṇadānabaladānādibhedā dānassa ānisaṃsasaññitā diṭṭhadhammikā, samparāyikā ca lābhā icchitabbā. Te alābhāti te sabbe tuyhaṃ alābhā, lābhā eva na honti. Diṭṭheva dhamme paccakkhabhūte imasmiṃyeva attabhāve bhavā diṭṭhadhammikā. Samparetabbato pecca gantabbato ‘‘samparāyo’’ti laddhanāme paraloke bhavā samparāyikā. Diṭṭhadhammikā ca samparāyikā ca diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikā. Dānānisaṃsasaṅkhātā lābhāti dānānisaṃsabhūtā lābhā. Sabbathā samameva hutvā samaṃ phalaṃ etesaṃ na ekadesenāti samasamaphalā. Piṇḍapātāti tabbisayaṃ dānamayaṃ puññamāha.
若就福田而言,它们果报同等,那么即使在同一相续中,凡夫与阿拉汉的成就虽有差别,难道他们的福田便有优劣之分吗?为明此义,故说“难道不是……吗”等。以“般涅槃的同等性”而言,即指烦恼般涅槃与蕴般涅槃的同等性。通过“受用后般涅槃”一语,说明:由受用殊胜团食所滋养的色身为所依,法身便安乐地舍离烦恼;同样,因食物之适悦成就,亦安乐地舍离诸蕴。由此,烦恼的舍离与蕴的舍离,皆以安乐成就为因,这便阐明了二种团食果报平等。而且,以“团食”为代表说明团食布施,也正是此意。正如善生当时生起如是广大心愿:“依靠此食,愿我天神的容色、快乐、力量等功德圆满成就。”同样,铁匠之子纯陀也生起广大心愿:“依靠此食,愿世尊的容色、快乐、力量等功德圆满成就。”如此,从他们二人的心愿,亦可了知二者果报同等。再者,世尊虽每日皆有二十四万亿次定之受用,然于成正觉日,发起新观时,通过色七法等十四种方式作意,依大观门入于诸定;于般涅槃日,他也入于这一……显示巴利原文
Yadi khettavasena nesaṃ samaphalatā adhippetā, satipi ekasantānabhāve puthujjanaarahantabhāvasiddhaṃ nanu tesaṃ khettaṃ visiṭṭhanti dassetuṃ ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādimāha. Parinibbānasamatāyāti kilesaparinibbānakhandhaparinibbānabhāvena parinibbānasamatāya. ‘‘Paribhuñjitvā parinibbuto’’ti etena yathā paṇītapiṇḍapātaparibhogūpatthambhitarūpakāyasannissayo dhammakāyo sukheneva kilese pariccaji, bhojanasappāyasaṃsiddhiyā evaṃ sukheneva khandhe pariccajīti evaṃ kilesapariccāgassa, khandhapariccāgassa ca sukhasiddhinimittatāya ubhinnaṃ piṇḍapātānaṃ samaphalatā jotitā. ‘‘Piṇḍapātasīsena ca piṇḍapātadānaṃ jotita’’nti vutto vāyamattho. Yathā hi sujātāya ‘‘imaṃ āhāraṃ nissāya mayhaṃ devatāya vaṇṇasukhabalādiguṇā sammadeva sampajjeyyu’’nti uḷāro ajjhāsayo tadā ahosi, evaṃ cundassapi kammāraputtassa ‘‘imaṃ āhāraṃ nissāya bhagavato vaṇṇasukhabalādiguṇā sammadeva sampajjeyyu’’nti uḷāro ajjhāsayoti evampi nesaṃ ubhinnaṃ samaphalatā veditabbā. Satipi catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattīnaṃ devasikaṃ vaḷañjanasamāpattibhāve yathā pana abhisambujjhanadivase abhinavavipassanaṃ paṭṭhapento rūpasattakādi (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.707 vitthāro) vasena cuddasahākārehi sannetvā mahāvipassanāmukhena tā samāpattiyo samāpajji, evaṃ parinibbānadivasepi sabbā tā samāpajjīti evaṃ samāpattisamatāyapi tesaṃ samaphalatā. Cundassa tāva anussaraṇaṃ uḷārataraṃ hotu bhagavato dinnabhāvena aññathattābhāvato, sujātāya pana kathaṃ devatāya dinnanti? Evaṃsaññibhāvatoti āha ‘‘sujātā cā’’tiādi. Aparabhāgeti abhisambodhito aparabhāge. Puna aparabhāgeti parinibbānato parato. Dhammasīsanti dhammānaṃ matthakabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Me gahitanti mama vasena gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mayhaṃ kirā’’tiādi.
增上的状态即是增上之义,故释为“导向最上性”。显示巴利原文
Adhipatibhāvo ādhipateyyanti āha ‘‘jeṭṭhabhāvasaṃvattaniyaka’’nti.
“律仪”指戒的律仪。“怨仇”指杀生等五种怨仇。因其具有怨的法性,又是怨的因,故称“怨仇”。“善巧”是指智慧,拥有智慧者即是善巧,故说“善巧者即具足智慧者”。“智成就”指智慧圆满,当依最上道来理解;而最上道能无余断除烦恼,因此说“以圣道……断除”。“断除了这恶法”的意思是:先以布施断除悭贪等恶法,以戒断除杀生等恶法,这属于部分断舍;然后通过止观法门,以镇伏方式舍离;接着依修道次第,以正断无余断除一切恶法。正因如此断除,贪等烦恼灭尽,以烦恼般涅槃而一切烦恼止息,寂灭,般涅槃。这是归结于有余涅槃界的教导,故说:“世尊如是观察……而发出自说(感叹偈颂)。显示巴利原文
Saṃvareti sīlasaṃvare. Veranti pāṇātipātādipañcavidhaṃ veraṃ. Tañhi veridhammabhāvato, verahetutāya ca ‘‘vera’’nti vuccati. Kosallaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, tena yutto kusaloti āha ‘‘kusalo pana ñāṇasampanno’’ti. Ñāṇasampadā nāma ñāṇapāripūrī, sā ca aggamaggavasena veditabbā, aggamaggo ca niravasesato kilese pajahatīti āha ‘‘ariyamaggena…pe… jahātī’’ti. Imaṃ pāpakaṃ jahitvāti dānena tāva lobhamacchariyādipāpakaṃ, sīlena pāṇātipātādipāpakaṃ jahitvā tadaṅgavasena pahāya tato samathavipassanādhammehi vikkhambhanavasena, tato maggapaṭipāṭiyā samucchedavasena anavasesaṃ pāpakaṃ pahāya. Tathā pahīnattā eva rāgādīnaṃ khayā kilesanibbānena sabbaso kilesavūpasamena nibbuto parinibbutoti saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto ‘‘iti cundassa…pe… sampassamāno udānaṃ udānesī’’ti.
双沙罗树解释显示巴利原文
Yamakasālavaṇṇanā
198 因此,那座园林在拘尸那罗,就如阿努罗陀城的塔园位于西南方一般,该园林也位于拘尸那罗的西南方。因为想要进城的人,从园林处接近并由此前往,故称为“邻近”;那片沙罗林就位于此邻近之处,并且沙罗树成行排列。“其中”指中央。据说,床座就铺设在那里。……那里有一部分是脚的位置,因此经中说“在两棵双沙罗树中间”。“交错”的意思是:由于树枝与枝条相互缠绕连接,所以看上去如同交错在一起。注释书中也说“树枝竖立”。至于经文所说“铺设头朝北的床”,那是为了让前来探视、能作最后面见的众天神得以瞻仰的适当方式而说的。然而,有些人说:“这句话的意思是脸朝向北方,头朝东方来铺设床座”,那纯属他们个人的见解。显示巴利原文
198.Evaṃtaṃ kusinārāyaṃ hotīti yathā anurādhapurassa thūpārāmo dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ, evaṃ taṃ uyyānaṃ kusinārāya dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ hoti. Tasmāti yasmā nagaraṃ pavisitukāmā uyyānato upecca vattanti gacchanti etenāti ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati, taṃ sālapantibhāvena ṭhitaṃ sālavanaṃ. Antarenāti vemajjhe. Tassa kira mañcakassāti tattha paññapiyamānassa tassa mañcakassa. Tatrāpi…pe… eko pādabhāgassa, tasmā ‘‘antarena yamakasālāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Saṃsibbitvāti aññamaññaāsattaviṭapasākhatāya saṃsibbitvā viya. ‘‘Ṭhitasākhā’’tipi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘uttarasīsakaṃ mañcakaṃ paññapehī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ pacchimadassanaṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgatānaṃ devatānaṃ daṭṭhuṃ yogyatāvasena vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘uttaradisāvilokanamukhaṃ pubbadisāsīsakaṃ katvā mañcakaṃ paññapehīti attho’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ.
“这些象中无上者”,指在依种姓、行境等而得名的象中,以力量最为优胜者。但在《中部注疏》中,有些象的来历与此处说法有所不同,不过,那只能看作是纯粹名称上的差别。显示巴利原文
Ete nāgānamuttamāti ete gottato gocariādināmakā hatthināgesu balena seṭṭhatamā. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148) pana keci hatthino ito aññathā āgatā, so pana nesaṃ nāmamattakato bhedo daṭṭhabbo.
从受用之时起……便逐渐消耗殆尽。而“并非因为被受用”,其意义应如前文所述来理解。“滚沸”是指波浪。因为业已获得机会,随业而起的疾病便压倒了健康,为了说明此义,所以说“如同”。世尊依前文所述的方式,本有能力住世一劫或一劫有余,但因住世如此之久并非必要,于是舍弃了寿行,给予了彼业以机会。因此,为彰显此义,说“如同”也是恰当的。显示巴利原文
Paribhuttakālato paṭṭhāya…pe… parikkhayaṃ gataṃ, ‘‘na pana paribhuttappaccayā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva attho daṭṭhabbo. Caṅgavāreti ūmiyaṃ. Katokāsassa kammassa vasena yathāsamuṭṭhito rogo ārogyaṃ abhimaddatīti katvā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā heṭṭhā vuttanayena kappaṃ, kappāvasesaṃ vā ṭhātuṃ samattho eva, tattakaṃ kālaṃ ṭhāne payojanābhāvato āyusaṅkhāre ossajjitvā tādisassa kammassa okāsaṃ adāsi, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘viyā’’tipi vattuṃ yujjatiyeva.
他们会认为应当行善:“这样的善,有大果报、大利益、大神力。”显示巴利原文
Kusalaṃ kātabbaṃ maññissanti ‘‘evaṃ mahapphalaṃ, evaṃ mahānisaṃsaṃ, mahānubhāvañca taṃ kusala’’nti.
即使只是令一位众生止息轮回之苦,在诸佛看来也更为重大,因为此事极其难得。因此才说了“又见到其他……”等语。这一含义,应借助《摩犍地耶经》(《经集》841)来阐明。显示巴利原文
Ekassāpi sattassa vaṭṭadukkhavūpasamo buddhānaṃ garutaro hutvā upaṭṭhāti atidullabhabhāvato, tasmā ‘‘aparampi passatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, svāyamattho māgaṇḍiyasuttena (su. ni. 841) dīpetabbo.
至于第三个原因,则是为了避免众生可能生起的无义之事。为了显示这一点,便又说道“又见到其他……”等语。显示巴利原文
Tatiyaṃ pana kāraṇaṃ sattānaṃ uppajjanakaanatthapariharaṇanti taṃ dassento puna ‘‘aparampi passatī’’tiādimāha.
“狮子卧”:此处,“卧”指躺卧的姿态。如同狮子那般躺卧,即是狮子卧,那便是狮子卧。或者,“狮子卧”指最殊胜的卧法。这两种含义将在后文说明。显示巴利原文
Sīhaseyyanti. Ettha sayanaṃ seyyā, sīhassa viya seyyā sīhaseyyā, taṃ sīhaseyyaṃ. Atha vā sīhaseyyanti seṭṭhaseyyaṃ, yadidaṃ atthadvayaṃ parato āgamissati.
所谓“以左胁而卧”等,是指享受欲乐者的卧姿。以右胁而卧者,实则无有,因为右手需握持身体等,不便如此,且这是就男子而言的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vāmena passena sentī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kāmabhogiseyyā,dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthassa sarīraggahaṇādiyogakkhamato, purisavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ.
他们无法仅以一侧而卧,因为痛苦会生起。显示巴利原文
Ekenapassena sayituṃ na sakkonti dukkhuppattito.
“狮子卧”:这就是如前所说的狮子卧。“具足威光”,以此显示狮子的无畏性。那些胆怯的其他兽类,进入自己栖处时,内心先有恐惧,随后胡乱躺卧;狮子则因无畏,就如正念现前的比丘一般,先安住正念而后卧。因此说“前脚”等语。将右前脚叠于左前脚之上,合置两前脚。“后脚”:指两后脚。应知按照上述方式,此处亦是合置双脚,这样的安放只是无畏惧的表现。至于“然后昂起头……”等所描述的狮子动作,显示醒觉而无有畏惧,应知这是由无畏自然成就的。狮子伸展身体,是为了让久住同一姿势的肢体,在行走等时灵活堪用。三遍狮子吼,则是为了驱退弱小的兽类。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ sīhaseyyāti ayaṃ evaṃ vuttā sīhaseyyā. ‘‘Tejussadattā’’ti iminā sīhassa abhīrubhāvaṃ dasseti. Bhīrukā hi sesamigā attano āsayaṃ pavisitvā santāsapubbakaṃ yathā tathā sayanti, sīho pana abhīrubhāvato satokārī bhikkhu viya satiṃ upaṭṭhāpetvāva sayati. Tenāha ‘‘purimapāde’’tiādi. Dakkhiṇe purimapāde vāmassa purimapādassa ṭhapanavasena dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā. Pacchimapādeti dve pacchimapāde. Vuttanayeneva idhāpi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne pādaṭṭhapanaṃ veditabbaṃ, ṭhitokāsasallakkhaṇaṃ abhīrubhāveneva. ‘‘Sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā’’tiādinā vuttā sīhakiriyā anutrāsapabujjhanaṃ viya abhīrubhāvasiddhā dhammatāvasenevāti veditabbā. Sīhavijambhitavijambhanaṃ ativelaṃ ekākārena ṭhapitānaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ gamanādikiriyāsu yogyabhāvāpādanatthaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ sīhanādanadanaṃ appesakkhamigajātapariharaṇatthaṃ.
“卧”(seyyā):此中因无牵挂而安住,故称卧。第四禅本身就是卧,即第四禅卧。那是怎样的第四禅呢?是出入息念的第四禅。因为从该定出起后,世尊增长毗婆舍那,次第证得最上道而成为如来。有人说:“这仅是近因,并非真正的卧。然而,《长部》中将会说‘从第四禅出定后,随着世尊便般涅槃’(长部2.219),因此世间的第四禅定才是如来卧。”若如此,如来卧便只在般涅槃时才成立了,然而世尊并非多数时间都安住于世间第四禅。但此处应知,是以最胜果而转起的第四禅。正如有情的睡眠以有分心生起,具有入睡那样的相状,且那是有情从初生以来便伴随的常习;同样地,世尊从圣生以来便具足的、以最胜果为体的第四禅,应知就是“如来卧”。狮子卧即最上的卧,因此说为“最上卧”。显示巴利原文
Seti abyāvaṭabhāvena pavattati etthāti seyyā, catutthajjhānameva seyyā catutthajjhānaseyyā. Kiṃ pana taṃ catutthajjhānanti? Ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ, tato hi vuṭṭhahitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā bhagavā anukkamena aggamaggaṃ adhigantvā tathāgato jātoti. ‘‘Tayidaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, na seyyā, tathāpi yasmā ‘catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyī’ti (dī. ni. 2.219) vakkhati, tasmā lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpatti eva tathāgataseyyā’’ti keci, evaṃ sati parinibbānakālikāva tathāgataseyyāti āpajjati, na ca bhagavā lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpajjanabahulo vihāsi. Aggaphalavasena pavattaṃ panettha catutthajjhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha yathā sattānaṃ niddupagamanalakkhaṇā seyyā bhavaṅgacittavasena hoti, sā ca nesaṃ paṭhamajātisamanvayā yebhuyyavuttikā, evaṃ bhagavato ariyajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ aggaphalabhūtaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ ‘‘tathāgataseyyā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Sīhaseyyā nāma seṭṭhaseyyāti āha ‘‘uttamaseyyā’’ti.
“不起卧”(anuṭṭhānaseyya):由于此卧没有起想,故为“不起”,那即是“不起卧”。因不存在“我将从此处起身”的作意,所以未说“作意起想”。“此处”:指进入这不起卧的时刻。这是身体的不起,而非心的不起;若以心不起,则称为入眠。为显示没有那种心的不起,故说“因睡眠”等语。此处“有分”,即指具有入眠相状的有分心。显示巴利原文
Natthi etissā uṭṭhānanti anuṭṭhānā, seyyā, taṃ anuṭṭhānaseyyaṃ. ‘‘Ito uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti manasikārassa abhāvato ‘‘uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasi karitvā’’ti na vuttaṃ.Etthāti etasmiṃ anuṭṭhānaseyyupagamane. Kāyavasena anuṭṭhānaṃ, na cittavasena, cittavasena ca anuṭṭhānaṃ nāma niddupagamananti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘niddāvasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgassāti niddupagamanalakkhaṇassa bhavaṅgassa.
“全面绽放”:指莲花盛开时遍一切处全面绽放,而非仅部分开放,因此说“一切处尽皆盛开花朵”。“一覆盖”:指被盛开的花朵以等遍的方式完全覆盖,布满一切处。“向下看的莲花”:指挺立的莲花,犹如正在俯视下方。由于被五种颜色的花朵所覆盖,因此如同孔雀尾羽束一般。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāliphullāti sabbatthakameva vikasanavasena phullā, na ekadesavikasanavasena. Tenāha ‘‘sabbe samantato pupphitā’’ti. Ekacchannāti samphullapupphehi ekākārena sabbattheva chāditā. Ullokapadumānīti heṭṭhā olokentāni viya tiṭṭhanapadumāni. Morapiñchakalāpo viya pañcavaṇṇapupphasañchāditattā.
“欢喜池所生”:指从欢喜池岸边所生。“大桶量”:约有一阿罗迦的量。“投入”:指被投掷进去。“只撒在身体上”:指只散落在身上。显示巴利原文
Nandapokkharaṇīsambhavānīti nandapokkharaṇītīrasambhavāni. Mahātumbamattanti āḷhakamattaṃ. Paviṭṭhānīti khittāni. Sarīrameva okirantīti sarīrameva ajjhokiranti.
“为诸天神所备办的栴檀粉末”:指风能将香味吹送六十乃至五十由旬远的纯白栴檀粉末。“天香网粉末”:指天界的香、天界的粉末。诸如雄黄、安善那粉末等,也应知是天界的、具有最上妙香的,因此说“一切天香、熏香之种种”。显示巴利原文
Devatānaṃupakappanacandanacuṇṇānīti saṭṭhipi paññāsampi yojanāni vāyanakasetavaṇṇacandanacuṇṇāni. Dibbagandhajālacuṇṇānīti dibbagandhadibbacuṇṇāni. Haritālaañjanacuṇṇādīnipi dibbāni paramasugandhāni evāti veditabbāni. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbadibbagandhavāsavikatiyo’’ti.
他们聚集在一个轮围世界,于虚空中奏乐,犹如大出离时的情形。显示巴利原文
Ekacakkavāḷe sannipatitvā antalikkhe vajjanti mahābhinikkhamanakāle viya.
“他们”指那些天神。“正在编织”即制作花鬘。“尚未完成”指已如愿完成。“以手执手”即用自己的手去执取他人的手。“以颈执颈”即如捉住脖子一般用自己的颈部去贴对方的颈部。“执已”即碰触之后。“大名闻,大名闻”是重复的称呼,是他们彼此打招呼的话。显示巴利原文
Tāti devatā. Ganthamānā vāti mālaṃ racantiyo eva. Apariniṭṭhitā vāti yathādhippāyaṃ pariyositā eva. Hatthena hatthanti attano hatthena parassa hatthaṃ. Gīvāya gīvanti kaṇṭhagāhavasena attano gīvāya parassa gīvaṃ. Gahetvāti āmasitvā. Mahāyaso mahāyasoti āmeḍitavasena aññamaññaṃ ālāpavacanaṃ.
199 “大精进”:谓见到为向如来致敬与供养而兴起的大精进。显示巴利原文
199.Mahantaṃ ussāhanti tathāgatassa pūjāsakkāravasena pavattiyamānaṃ mahantaṃ ussāhaṃ disvā.
这里所说的“道”,即指前分道。“适宜”是指与所应证悟的九种出世间法相称。显示巴利原文
Sāyevapana paṭipadāti pubbabhāgapaṭipadā eva. Anucchavikattāti adhigantabbassa navavidhalokuttaradhammassa anurūpattā.
所谓“戒”,是指行戒。“规定的仪则”即是行戒。“直到种姓”是说到种姓智为止,这期间所应修习的止观便是正行道。现在为了从遮遣与顺显两方面阐明此正行道,而说“是故”等语。“胜者时绳”指木匠胜者所安立、用以显示应避免与应受持之法的墨线,也就是学处的界限。在有关近事男、近事女的章节中,说到“作香供养、作花鬘供养”等语,这是依行戒的部分来说明其行持,由此应知,这也允许比丘、比丘尼如此而行。显示巴利原文
Sīlanti cārittasīlamāha. Ācārapaññattīti cārittasīlaṃ. Yāva gotrabhutoti yāva gotrabhuñāṇaṃ, tāva pavattetabbā samathavipassanā sammāpaṭipadā. Idāni taṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ byatirekato, anvayato ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Jinakāḷasuttanti jinamahāvaḍḍhakinā ṭhapitaṃ vajjetabbagahetabbadhammasandassanakāḷasuttaṃ sikkhāpadamariyādaṃ, upāsakopāsikāvāresu ‘‘gandhapūjaṃ mālāpūjaṃ karotī’’ti vacanaṃ cārittasīlapakkhe ṭhapetvā karaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tena bhikkhubhikkhunīnampi tathākaraṇaṃ anuññātamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“此人”是就法随法行道而说的。显示巴利原文
Ayañhīti dhammānudhammapaṭipadaṃ sandhāya vadati.
优波婆那长老注释显示巴利原文
Upavāṇattheravaṇṇanā
200 “移开”指他使花从原处退开,而非砍断。因此说“阿难”等。“或如所说”即如《等心说法经》中所说。“遮蔽”意为覆盖。显示巴利原文
200.Apanesīti ṭhitappadesato yathā apagacchati, evamakāsi, na pana nibbhacchi. Tenāha ‘‘ānando’’tiādi. Vuttasadisā vāti samacittapariyāyadesanāyaṃ (a. ni. 2.37) vuttasadisā eva. Āvārentoti chādento.
由于他曾是迦叶佛塔庙的守护天神,因此唯有这位长老具足威光,而非其他阿拉汉。应联系此义加以连属。显示巴利原文
Yasmā kassapassabuddhassa cetiye ārakkhadevatā ahosi, tasmā therova tejussado, na aññe arahantoti ānetvā yojanā.
现在,为从佛降临之时起详细开显此义,便开示“毗婆尸佛,这位正自觉者……”等文。其中“四大王天”一句,因地居天等亦被含摄,故应以牛与牛犊的归纳法来理解。那些人类的……显示巴利原文
Idāni āgamanato paṭṭhāya tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘vipassimhi kira sammāsambuddhe’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Cātumahārājikā devatā’’ti idaṃ gobalībaddañāyena gahetabbaṃ bhummadevatādīnampi tappariyāpannattā. Tesaṃ manussānaṃ.
“此处”:指迦叶世尊的塔庙。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti kassapassa bhagavato cetiye.
201 “同意”:意为使其欢喜。显示巴利原文
201.Adhivāsentīti rocenti.
所谓“如被斩首般倒下”(chinnapāta),是抽象名词的中性表达。“旋转着”(Āvaṭṭantī)的意思是:正面朝向旋转。在掉落之处,它们仅以旋转的方式移动数尺,随后又以旋转的方式回到原掉落处。因此说:“旋转着,便回到掉落之处”。“翻转着”(Vivaṭṭantī)的意思是从掉落之处翻转离开。因此说:“翻转着,便从掉落之处趋向对面”。为了说明向前旋转是“正向旋转”(āvaṭṭanaṃ),其余三种为“反向旋转”(vivaṭṭanaṃ),故说“再者”等语。天神无法支撑自己的身体,如同水一般,因为会沉没其中。因此说“在那里”等语。“在那里”:指在原本的土地上。由于那里的地界柔软、微妙而细滑,天神便会沉没。“在地面上化现出地”:指以神通威力,在原本的土地上化现出能够支撑自己身体的地。显示巴利原文
Chinnapāto viya chinnapāto, taṃ chinnapātaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso yaṃ. Āvaṭṭantīti abhimukhabhāvena vaṭṭanti. Yattha patitā, tato katipayaratanaṭṭhānaṃ vaṭṭanavaseneva gantvā puna yathāpatitameva ṭhānaṃ vaṭṭanavasena āgacchanti. Tenāha ‘‘āvaṭṭantiyopatitaṭṭhānameva āgacchantī’’ti. Vivaṭṭantīti yattha patitā, tato vinivaṭṭanti. Tenāha ‘‘patitaṭṭhānato parabhāgaṃ vaṭṭamānā gacchantī’’ti. Purato vaṭṭanaṃ āvaṭṭanaṃ, itaraṃ tividhampi vivaṭṭananti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Devatā dhāretuṃ na sakkoti udakaṃ viya osīdanato. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthāti pakatipathaviyaṃ. Devatā osīdanti dhātūnaṃ saṇhasukhumālabhāvato. Pathaviyaṃpathaviṃ māpesunti pakatipathaviyaṃ attano sarīraṃ dhāretuṃ samatthaṃ iddhānubhāvena pathaviṃ māpesuṃ.
即使没有忧,也可能存在某种贪;然而若无贪,忧则绝无可能生起。因此,由于它们同住一处,故说“离贪者”即已断除忧者。犹如石柱一般,对悦意与不悦意的对象皆无变异。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ domanasse asatipi ekacco rāgo hotiyeva, rāge pana asati domanassassa asambhavo evāti tadekaṭṭhabhāvatoti āha ‘‘vītarāgāti pahīnadomanassā’’ti. Silāthambhasadisā iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikāratāya.
四种悚惧处的解释显示巴利原文
Catusaṃvejanīyaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
202 “恒河对岸”:指恒河的下游区域。“拿着清扫行舍的扫帚”等,是显示各自在所住处日常作务的方式。“如是于二时”等,是为举例说明而引述,此义前已获得。显示巴利原文
202.Apāragaṅgāyāti gaṅgāya orambhāge. ‘‘Saṅkārachaḍḍakasammajjaniyo gahetvā’’tiādi attano attano vasanaṭṭhāne vattakaraṇākāradassanaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ dvīsu kālesū’’tiādi nidassanatthaṃ paccāmasanaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā adhigataṃ.
“bhāvanīya”一词,若以业具格释之,则有“应被尊重”之义,故说“意所修习、所尊重者”。若依第二种解释,则修习与增长由断除敌对法而来,故说“或他们……”等。显示巴利原文
Kammasādhano sambhāvanattho bhāvanīya-saddoti āha ‘‘manasā bhāvite sambhāvite’’ti. Dutiyavikappe pana bhāvanaṃ, vaḍḍhanañca paṭipakkhapahānatoti āha ‘‘ye vā’’tiādi.
这是指对佛陀等三种对象怀有清净信心,而非仅仅对业果有信心。他这样的信成就,应如此理解:为以果显因,故说「具足仪轨者」。所谓「悚惧」,是伴有愧的智慧,豪族地位等也是它生起的原因,故说「能产生悚惧的(事)」。显示巴利原文
Buddhādīsu tīsu vatthūsu pasannacittassa, na kammaphalasaddhāmattena. Sā cassa saddhāsampadā evaṃ veditabbāti phalena hetuṃ dassento ‘‘vattasampannassā’’ti āha. Saṃvego nāma sahottappañāṇaṃ, abhijātiṭṭhānādīnipi tassa uppattihetūni bhavantīti āha ‘‘saṃvegajanakānī’’ti.
「塔庙游行」即为了礼敬塔庙而作的游行。他们必定生于天界,因为以佛陀功德为所缘的善思,具有导向天界的作用。显示巴利原文
Cetiyapūjanatthaṃ cārikā cetiyacārikā. Sagge patiṭṭhahissantiyeva buddhaguṇārammaṇāya kusalacetanāya saggasaṃvattaniyabhāvato.
阿难问事注释。以下逐一解释:「于此」是指女人。这就是最高的行持,也就是不见,因为不见是一切无益之事的根源。「贪爱」是指欲贪。「心之摇动」是指心的躁动,它会障碍行持。「作嘎吱声后」是指咀嚼带有骨头的食物时,发出咀嚼的声响。在无量长时间中领受苦受,是指领受没有间断的苦受。「混融」是指不混合、没有摩擦。「侵入」是指在这里心不进入。如同手持利剑的怨敌,又如想要吃人的饿鬼。「靠近」是指以践踏等方式加害。「于彼」是指对于女人。出家者应作之事,是指出家人应当做的事情,比如接受食物等。「念」是指应当让身至念现前。显示巴利原文
Ānandapucchākathāvaṇṇanā
203 「极不系缚」指不负重担。「心已送往」指心已朝向涅槃。显示巴利原文
203.Etthāti mātugāme. Ayaṃ uttamā paṭipatti,yadidaṃ adassanaṃ, dassanamūlakattā tappaccayānaṃ sabbānatthānaṃ. Lobhoti kāmarāgo. Cittacalanā paṭipattiantarāyakaro cittakkhobho. Murumurāpetvāti saaṭṭhikaṃ katvā khādane anuravadassanaṃ. Aparimitaṃ kālaṃ dukkhānubhavanaṃ aparicchinnadukkhānubhavanaṃ. Vissāsoti visaṅgo ghaṭṭanābhāvo. Otāroti tattha cittassa anuppaveso. Asihatthena verīpurisena, pisācenāpi khāditukāmena. Āsīdeti akkamanādivasena bādheyya. Assāti mātugāmassa. Pabbajitehi kattabbakammanti āmisapaṭiggahaṇādi pabbajitehi kātabbaṃ kammaṃ. Satīti vā kāyagatāsati upaṭṭhāpetabbā.
204 「已弹开」是指以弹棉花的弓,如梳理纷乱之丝那样把它弹开。因此说「善弹开」,意为以不混杂的方式充分弹开。通过描述美丽且令人警策之处,也说明了住处。显示巴利原文
204.Atantibaddhāti abhāravahā. Pesitacittāti nibbānaṃ pati pesitacittā.
205 「破坏」是指如同用弹棉花的弓,以解开缠结的方式将头发打散。因此说「善揉打」,意为不混杂地善加揉打。通过描述既美丽又令人悚惧的地方,也就说明了居住的处所。显示巴利原文
205.Vihatenāti kappāsavihananadhanunā pabbajaṭānaṃ vijaṭanavasena hatena. Tenāha ‘‘supothitenā’’ti, asaṅkaraṇavasena suṭṭhu pothitenāti attho, dassanīyasaṃvejanīyaṭṭhānakittanena ca vasanaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ.
「未见到长老而招呼」是指虽然没有见到,但通过省知长老所在的地方和他的行持,而做出招呼。显示巴利原文
Ānandaacchariyadhammavaṇṇanā
207 身业的有益性,是因为以利益为意乐而转起,所以说「以利益增长而作」。快乐性是指没有身体的苦,而心乐性则是由心所生的乐而起,所以说「以乐与喜悦而作」。为了显示「无分离、一体、无二」之义,故说「如同」等语句。由于导师的佛田地成就,以及长老的意乐成就,这项业无法以“仅此而已”来衡量,它是无有限量的,所以说「乃至轮围山」等语句。显示巴利原文
207.Theraṃ adisvā āmantesīti tattha adisvā āvajjanto therassa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ, pavattiñca ñatvā āmantesi.
如是转起,即依此个别慈心修习而转起。由此造作、累积了能作为涅槃亲依止的福德,故称「已作福者」,意为为证阿拉汉果而修行。因此说「显示胜愿圆满」。显示巴利原文
Kāyakammassa hitabhāvo hitajjhāsayena pavattitattāti āha ‘‘hitavuddhiyā katenā’’ti. Sukhabhāvo kāyikadukkhābhāvo, cetasikasukhabhāvo cetasikasukhasamuṭṭhitattā cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sukhasomanasseneva katenā’’ti. Āvirahovibhāgato advayabhāvato advayenāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Satthu khettabhāvasampattiyā, therassa ajjhāsayasampattiyā ca ‘‘ettakamida’’nti pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pamāṇavirahitattā tassa kammassāti āha ‘‘cakkavāḷampī’’tiādi.
犹如将某处收缩而立的大地铺展开来,犹如将凝缩的虚空扩张开来,犹如将高达十六万八千由旬的轮围山向下沉没,犹如将高达十六万八千由旬的须弥山拔起,犹如握住长宽百由旬的大阎浮树干摇晃——这五个譬喻,正是为了显示长老功德的广大,彰显其难行能行之处。通过「又」字,应知包含「如今我是阿拉汉、正自觉者」「在含括诸天的世间中,无有能与我匹敌者」等语句。「敏达」指具备称为蕴善巧等的通达;「有智慧者」指具足称为慧、且已善加修习的智慧。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pavattitenāti evaṃ odissakamettābhāvanāya vasena pavattitena. Vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtaṃ kataṃ upacitaṃ puññaṃ etenāti katapuñño, arahattādhigamāya katādhikāroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘abhinīhārasampannosīti dassetī’’ti.
208 「款待法」:此是依本性行为规范而言。然而对于前来的比丘、比丘尼,则以问答方式,随其心意适时说法;对于男居士、女居士,则靠近而坐,与之交谈而说。显示巴利原文
208. Katthaci saṅkucitaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ mahāpathaviṃ pattharanto viya, paṭisaṃhaṭaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ ākāsaṃ vitthārento viya, catusaṭṭhādhikayojanasatasahassubbedhaṃ cakkavāḷagiriṃ adho osārento viya, aṭṭhasaṭṭhādhikasahassayojanasatasahassubbedhaṃ sineruṃ ukkhipento viya, satayojanāyāmavitthāraṃ mahājambuṃ khandhe gahetvā cālento viyāti pañca hi upamā hi therassa guṇakathā mahantabhāvadassanatthañceva aññesaṃ dukkaṭabhāvadassanatthañca āgatāva. Eteneva cāti ca-saddena ‘‘ahaṃ etarahi arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ (dī. ni. 2.4), ‘‘sadevakasmiṃ lokasmiṃ natthi me paṭipuggalo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405; mi. pa. 5.11) ca evaṃ ādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Byattoti khandhakosallādisaṅkhātena veyyattiyena samannāgato. Medhāvīti medhāsaṅkhātāya sammābhāvitāya paññāya samannāgato.
209 “款待法”是依通常的待人接物方式而说的;然而,对于前来的比丘与比丘尼,则以问答的方式,随其心意、应时而说法;对于近事男与近事女,则依随宜谈话的方式而作开示。显示巴利原文
209.Paṭisanthāradhammanti pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ, upagatānaṃ pana bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca pucchāvissajjanavasena ceva cittarucivasena ca yathākālaṃ dhammaṃ desetiyeva, upāsakopāsikānaṃ pana upanisinnakathāvasena.
《大善见王经》的开示注释显示巴利原文
Mahāsudassanasuttadesanāvaṇṇanā
210 Khuddaka一词意为“适合的”,ka词缀表示“小”,故称khuddakanagaraka(小城),即指似城但狭小、拥挤之处。由于该地多尘、粗糙而开阔,所以称为ujjaṅgalanagaraka(丛林小城),据此又称visamanagarake(不平坦的小城)。与其他大城相比,其规模仅及一部分,故类似sākhā(分支市镇)。这里,khuddakanagarake表示此城的狭小;ujjaṅgalanagarake表示因土地缺陷而卑劣;sākhānagarake则表示附属地位。“Sārappattā”:以财富的精华等,达到实质性的伟大。显示巴利原文
210.Khuddaka-saddo patirūpavācī, ka-saddo appatthoti āha ‘‘khuddakanagaraketi nagarapatirūpake sambādhe khuddakanagarake’’ti. Dhuparavisālasaṇṭhānatāya taṃ ‘‘ujjaṅgalanagaraka’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘visamanagarake’’ti. Aññesaṃ mahānagarānaṃ ekadesappamāṇatāya sākhāsadise. Ettha ca ‘‘khuddakanagarake’’ti iminā tassa nagarassa appakabhāvo vutto, ‘‘ujjaṅgalanagarake’’ti iminā bhūmivipattiyā nihīnabhāvo, ‘‘sākhānagarake’’ti iminā appadhānabhāvo. Sārappattāti vibhavasārādinā sāramahattaṃ pattā.
“咖哈巴那车(kahāpaṇasakaṭa)”:此处他们说“指双瓮之车,一瓮等于十安巴那”。“两辆进入”:指两辆咖哈巴那车,依两种收入之方式而进入。显示巴利原文
Kahāpaṇasakaṭanti ettha ‘‘dvikumbhaṃ sakaṭaṃ. Kumbho pana dasambaṇo’’ti vadanti. Dve pavisantīti dve kahāpaṇasakaṭāni dve āyavasena pavisanti.
“Subhikkhā”:指食物容易获得,而且是美好的食物,因此说“具足嚼食与啖食”。“发出声音”:指以传远的声音,怀着喜悦发出鹤鸣般的鸣叫声。“Avivittā(不空旷)”:指不空旷——有时一辆车先行,另一辆车追随其后;有时被指派的第二辆车先行,另一辆再追随其后,如此相互追随。“此处”:指拘舍婆提城。由于该城广大,并具有神通等功德,鼓等乐器一直持续被演奏着。“samma”声是互相亲切问候的声音。“tāḷa”声是铜钹等一切打击乐器的声音。“kumbhathūṇa”声是釜鼓的声音。显示巴利原文
Subhikkhāti sulabhāhārā, sundarāhārā ca. Tenāha ‘‘khajjabhojjasampannā’’ti. Saddaṃ karonteti ravasārinā tuṭṭhabhāvena koñcanādaṃ karonte. Avivittāti asuññā, kadāci ratho paṭhamaṃ gacchati, taṃ añño anubandhanto gacchati, kadāci dutiyaṃ vuttaratho paṭhamaṃ gacchati, itaro taṃ anubandhati evaṃ aññamaññaṃ anubandhamānā. Etthāti kusāvatīnagare. Tassa mahantabhāvato ceva iddhādibhāvato ca niccaṃ payojitāneva bheriādīni tūriyāni, samma sammāti vā aññamaññaṃ piyālāpasaddo samma-saddo. Kaṃsatāḷādisabbatāḷāvacarasaddo tāḷa-saddo, kūṭabheri-saddo kumbhathūṇasaddo.
这些声音,在别处则依次对应:或因街道上布满垃圾,或因在林中采集球茎、根、叶等,或因那里谋生艰难。而此处并非如此,因为一切如同天界般,功德圆满具足。显示巴利原文
Evarūpāsaddā honti kacavarākiṇṇavīthitāya, araññe kandamūlapaṇṇādiggahaṇāya, tattha dukkhajīvikatāya cāti yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Idha na evaṃ ahosi devaloke viya sabbaso paripuṇṇasampattikatāya.
“极大的喧哗声”:由于具足信心的天人与优婆塞们,前方发出了盛大的欢呼声。在那里,因为尚无为世尊建造的精舍,而比丘僧团又极为庞大,他们到来后……(便)予以派遣。派遣时,他说道:“为什么世尊在最后时刻不将自身的行踪告知我们,以致我们心生忧恼呢?”于是以“婆悉吒,今日……”等的教令遣使。显示巴利原文
Mahantaṃ kolāhalanti saddhāsampannānaṃ devatānaṃ, upāsakānañca vasena purato purato mahatī ugghosanā hoti. Tattha bhagavantaṃ uddissa katassa vihārassa abhāvato, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca mahantabhāvato te āgantvā…pe… pesesi. Pesento ca ‘‘kathañhi nāma bhagavā pacchime kāle attano pavattiṃ amhākaṃ nārocesi, nesaṃ domanassaṃ mā ahosī’’ti ‘‘ajja kho vāseṭṭhā’’tiādinā sāsanaṃ pesesi.
末罗族的礼敬注释显示巴利原文
Mallānaṃ vandanāvaṇṇanā
211 「Aghāvino」:指他们经历并显示苦,即苦已显现,故说为“生起苦者”。「Kulaparivattaṃ」:因亲属血缘关系,家族于此流转。各个以家族阶层而住的有情群体,被称为“依家族轮转”,因而说“家族轮转”。而那些末罗王族,依各自的家族轮转来划分,住于城中街道等处,所以说“以街道区域及巷陌区域”。显示巴利原文
211. Aghaṃ dukkhaṃ āventi pakāsentīti aghāvino, pākaṭībhūtadukkhāti āha ‘‘uppannadukkhā’’ti. Ñātisālohitabhāvena kulaṃ parivattati etthāti kulaparivattaṃ. Taṃ taṃkulīnabhāgena ṭhito sattanikāyo ‘‘kulaparivattaso’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘kulaparivatta’’nti. Te pana taṃtaṃkulaparivattaparicchinnā mallarājāno tasmiṃ nagare vīthiādisabhāgena vasantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vīthisabhāgena ceva racchāsabhāgena cā’’ti.
须跋陀罗游方者的故事注释显示巴利原文
Subhaddaparibbājakavatthuvaṇṇanā
212 「Kaṅkhādhammo」:疑本身即是疑法。「Ekato」:指不区分土地,如同共同拥有。「Bījagga」:从种子中取最初的部分,准备食物后所作的布施。「Gabbhakāle」:从怀胎之后、取乳之时。因此说“破胎取乳后”等。「Puthukakāle」:谷物尚未完全成熟、适合嫩苗的果实之时。「Lāyanagga」:于成熟谷物收割时,最初开始收割所作的布施。「Veṇagga」:收割后的谷物编结成束放置,开始做束时所作的布施。「Kalāpagga」:将束集合成堆时,最初所作的布施。「Khalagga」:从束中取出,在打谷时最初所作的布施。「Khalabhaṇḍagga」:打谷并扬去谷壳后,堆积谷物时最初所作的布施。「Koṭṭhagga」:将谷物从打谷场装入仓库时最初所作的布施。「Uddharitvā」:从仓库取出之后。显示巴利原文
212. Kaṅkhā eva kaṅkhādhammo. Ekato vāti bhūmiṃ avibhajitvā sādhāraṇatova. Bījato ca aggaṃ gahetvā āhāraṃ sampādetvā dānaṃ bījaggaṃ. Gabbhakāleti gabbhadhāraṇato paraṃ khīraggahaṇakāle. Tenāha ‘‘gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ niharitvā’’tiādi. Puthukakāleti sassānaṃ nātipakke puthukayogyaphalakāle. Lāyanagganti pakkassa sassassa lavane lavanārambhe dānaṃ adāsi. Lunassa sassassa veṇivasena bandhitvā ṭhapanaṃ veṇikaraṇaṃ. Tassa ārambhe dānaṃ veṇaggaṃ. Veṇiyo pana ekato katvā rāsikaraṇaṃ kalāpo. Tattha aggadānaṃ kalāpaggaṃ. Kalāpato nīharitvā maddane aggadānaṃ khalaggaṃ. Madditaṃ ophuṇitvā dhaññassa rāsikaraṇe aggadānaṃ khalabhaṇḍaggaṃ. Dhaññassa khalato koṭṭhe pakkhipane aggadānaṃ koṭṭhaggaṃ. Uddharitvāti koṭṭhato uddharitvā.
他作了九种最上的布施,以“我如何才能从导师跟前最先获得解脱?”这样的最上布施,显示了他为出离轮回所累积的顺决择分善法功德,以及他的智慧已如此成熟,堪能成为最上法开示的容器。因此说“我将为他开示这最上之法”等。他留在原地,收敛傲慢之后。显示巴利原文
‘‘Navaaggadānāni adāsī’’ti iminā ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho ahaṃ satthu santike aggatova mucceyya’’nti aggaggadānavasena vivaṭṭūpanissayassa kusalassa katūpacitattā, ñāṇassa ca tathā paripākaṃ gatattā aggadhammadesanāya tassa bhājanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘imaṃ aggadhammaṃ tassa desessāmī’’tiādi. Ohīyitvā saṅkocaṃ āpajjitvā.
213 「虽想知,却不执取成见」:虽然想要了知,却不固执己见。「未洞察」,是对有疑惑者的提问用语,解释为“他们知道”的意思。因此经中说:“所有人都没有洞察。”这里的“他们”指富兰那迦叶等人。“那个主张”,即“大王!造作者……令造作者……”等所宣称的,或者说就是那一切知智的主张。“能引导出离的”,指具备教诫神变,或指他们所成立的教义,因能从轮回中出离,故称能引导出离。由这些法的成就,可推知其一切知性;反之,由这些法的缺失,则可知其非一切知性。因此说“因此……”等。“因无义利”,指须跋陀罗没有可证得的义利。“因无机会”,指没有那样详细开示法的机会。现在,为了显示那没有机缘的情况,而说“初夜分时……”等。显示巴利原文
213.Aññātukāmova na sandiṭṭhiṃ parāmāsī. Abbhaññiṃsūti sandehajātassa pucchāvacananti katvā jāniṃsūti atthamāha. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sabbeva na abbhaññiṃsū’’ti. Nesanti pūraṇādīnaṃ. Sā paṭiññāti ‘‘karoto kho mahārāja kārayato’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.166) paṭiññātā, sabbaññupaṭiññā eva vā. Niyyānikāti sappāṭihāriyā, tesaṃ vā siddhantasaṅkhātā paṭiññā vaṭṭato nissaraṇaṭṭhena niyyānikāti. Sāsanassa sampattiyā tesaṃ sabbaññutaṃ, tabbipariyāyato ca asabbaññutaṃ gacchatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Atthābhāvatoti subhaddassa sādhetabbaatthābhāvato. Okāsābhāvatoti tathā vitthāritaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desetuṃ avasarābhāvato. Idāni tameva okāsābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamayāmasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
214 那些成就沙门性的法,修习它们即成为沙门;而这些法,从最殊胜的意义上说,就是圣道法。因此,依四种道的成就,经中宣说了四种沙门。为了显示在外道中完全没有这些沙门,所以说“第一种是入流沙门”等。依照先前的开示,即“须跋陀罗!无论在哪一个法、律中……”等所说的开示。通过遮诠与表诠来阐明所表达的意义,这第一种方式,在此应当了知也被包含在“先前的开示”这一句中。在确定自己的教法时,关联为:“就在这……中”。“已着手修观者”,指修习止观业处者,也就是修观者,这是针对已达顶峰的观行者而说,并非指刚刚开始修观的人。但另有一些人说:“在外道中,连观修起始的著述也没有”,这是一种不加区分情况的说法。“已证得之立足处”,指达成证悟的原因,也就是为达该目的的预备行道。以此预备道证得入流道,而非更高的道。他安立在入流道上,由于这道的不动法性,或者在那方面以成就而曾安住,依“过去曾有”显示巴利原文
214. Yesaṃ samaṇabhāvakarānaṃ dhammānaṃ sampādanena samaṇo, te pana ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ariyamaggadhammāti catumaggasaṃsiddhiyā pāḷiyaṃ cattāro samaṇā vuttāti te bāhirasamaye sabbena sabbaṃ natthīti dassento ‘‘paṭhamo sotāpannasamaṇo’’tiādimāha. Purimadesanāyāti ‘‘yasmiñca kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye’’tiādinā vuttāya desanāya. Byatirekato, anvayato ca adhippeto attho vibhāvīyatīti paṭhamanayopettha ‘‘purimadesanāyā’’ti padena saṅgahito vāti daṭṭhabbo. Attano sāsanaṃ niyamento āha ‘‘imasmiṃ kho’’ti yojanā. Āraddhavipassakehīti samādhikammikavipassakehi, sikhāppattavipassake sandhāya vuttaṃ, na paṭṭhapitavipassane. Apare pana ‘‘bāhirakasamaye vipassanārambhassa ganthopi natthevāti avisesavacanameta’’nti vadanti. Adhigataṭṭhānanti adhigatassa kāraṇaṃ, tadatthaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadanti attho, yena sotāpattimaggo adhigato, na uparimaggo, so sotāpattimagge ṭhito akuppadhammatāya tassa, tattha vā siddhito ṭhitapubbo bhūtapubbagatiyāti sotāpattimaggaṭṭho sotāpanno, na sesaariyā bhūmantaruppattito. Sotāpanno hi attanā adhigataṭṭhānaṃ sotāpattimaggaṃ aññassa kathetvā sotāpattimaggaṭṭhaṃ kareyya, na aṭṭhamako asambhavato. Esa nayo sesamaggaṭṭhesūti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Paguṇaṃ kammaṭṭhānanti attano paguṇaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ, eteneva ‘‘avisesavacana’’nti vādo paṭikkhittoti daṭṭhabbo.
这是指一切知智。因为那种智能觉悟一切所知法,故被称为“善巧、熟练、微妙”,这是因它在一切法中无着无碍地运行。多出一年。依此道能正确如实地通达四谛法,故称为“理趣”,也就是出世间道,所以说是“圣道法”。依此而能亲见圣道,故为“分处”,指观。因此说“在分处,即观道中”。“沙门亦”,这里的“亦”字也应连接到“分处随转”那里,然后结合起来理解。因此说:“分处随转……无有,是这样说的。”显示巴利原文
Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃadhippetaṃ. Tañhi sabbañeyyadhammāvabodhane ‘‘kusalaṃ chekaṃ nipuṇa’’nti vuccati tattha asaṅgaappaṭihataṃ pavattatīti katvā. Samadhikāni ekena vassena. Ñāyanti etena catusaccadhammaṃ yāthāvato paṭivijjhantīti ñāyo, lokuttaramaggoti āha ‘‘ariyamaggadhammassā’’ti. Padissati etena ariyamaggo paccakkhato dissatīti padeso, vipassanāti vuttaṃ ‘‘padese vipassanāmagge’’ti. Samaṇopīti ettha pi-saddo ‘‘padesavattī’’ti etthāpi ānetvā sambandhitabboti āha ‘‘padesavatti…pe… natthīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
215 这里的“那位”(so)指被这样说的弟子。“被那位”(tena)指那位导师。他因被委任负责度人出家等事务,而被安置在自己的地位上。显示巴利原文
215.Soti tathāvutto antevāsī. Tenāti ācariyena. Attano ṭhāne ṭhapito hoti parapabbājanādīsu niyuttattā.
“亲证声闻”(sakkhisāvaka)即现前亲证的弟子,意为在世尊面前亲闻的弟子。“在世尊住世时”(bhagavati dharamāne)指在世尊仍住世期间,也就是在世尊面前。其余两类也是同样的道理。“全体他”(sabbopi so)指所有这三类弟子。然而,这位(须跋陀罗)已证得阿拉汉果,因此到达了圆满的顶峰,成为最后一位亲证声闻。显示巴利原文
Sakkhisāvakoti paccakkhasāvako, sammukhasāvakoti attho. Bhagavati dharamāneti dharamānassa bhagavato santike. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Sabbopi soti sabbo so tividhopi. Ayaṃ pana arahattaṃ patto, tasmā paripuṇṇagatāya matthakappatto pacchimo sakkhisāvakoti.
如来最后教诫注释显示巴利原文
Tathāgatapacchimavācāvaṇṇanā
216 “彼”(taṃ),为显示对比丘僧团的教诫之责……乃至……由结集法的长老们所说,这是此处的意旨。对于结集在经藏与论藏中的法,加以完整的整理、令其明了,称为“开示”;而对于该法的本质加以宣告、使人知晓,并将其安立于应度者的相续心中,则称为“施设”。因此说“法也是已开示及已施设的”。同样地,对于结集在律藏中的义理,因其能调伏身语行为而得“律”之名,对此义理加以完整的整理、令其明了,即名为“开示”;对该义理的本质宣告、使人知晓,并且无混杂地安立,则名为“施设”。因此说“律也是已开示及已施设的”。由于律作为增上戒学的教说,是教法的根本,所以应当首先学习。现在,为从本质上显示这扼要的教诫,而说“我确已为你们……”等。其中,“依七种罪聚”是指依不违犯七种罪聚的方法。如此便完成导师的职责:通过分别“这是你们应当作的,这是不应当作的”来教诫。显示巴利原文
216.Tanti bhikkhusaṅghassa ovādakaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ…pe… vuttaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehīti adhippāyo. Suttābhidhammasaṅgahitassa dhammassa atisajjanaṃ sambodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ veneyyasantāne ṭhapanaṃ paññāpananti ‘‘dhammopi desito cevapaññatto cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā vinayatantisaṅgahitassa kāyavācānaṃ vinayanato ‘‘vinayo’’ti laddhādhivacanassa atthassa atisajjanaṃ sambodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ paññāpananti ‘‘vinayopi desito ceva paññatto cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhisīlasikkhāniddesabhāvena sāsanassa mūlabhūtattā vinayo paṭhamaṃ sikkhitabboti taṃ tāva ayamuddesaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘mayā hi vo’’tiādimāha. Tattha sattāpattikkhandhavasenāti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamanīyatāvasena . Satthukiccaṃ sādhessati ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabbaṃ, idaṃ vo na kattabba’’nti kattabbākattabbassa vibhāgena anusāsanato.
「以种种的行相」(tenatenākārena),是指以种种随顺应度者意乐的方式。「这些法」(ime dhammā),是指三十七菩提分法。由于以这些法为侧重,经的宣说即谓之「已开示经藏」。通过随顺种种行法而教诫正行,由此成就导师的事业。依善、不善、无记的分别而有九种因。「七触」等,是结合七识界而说的。在法随顺中,有三法发趣等六种,同样地,于法逆、法随顺逆、法逆随顺中也是如此。具备此二十四种全发趣的,即是「二十四全发趣」。然而,若依缘随顺等而详加分别,实则有无量的理趣,因此说为「以无边际理趣的大发趣为庄严」。再者,由蕴、处、界等的分别而如理作意,能引生四谛的现证,由此成就导师、正自觉者所应作的事业。显示巴利原文
Tenatenākārenāti tena tena veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena pakārena. Ime dhammeti ime sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhamme. Tappadhānattā suttantadesanāya ‘‘suttantapiṭakaṃ desita’’nti vuttaṃ. Satthukiccaṃ sādhessati taṃtaṃcariyānurūpaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā anusāsanato. Kusalākusalābyākatavasena nava hetū. ‘‘Satta phassā’’tiādi sattaviññāṇadhātusampayogavasena vuttaṃ. Dhammānulome tikapaṭṭhānādayo cha, tathā dhammapaccanīye, dhammānulomapaccanīye, dhammapaccanīyānulometi catuvīsati samantapaṭṭhānāni etassāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ pana paccayānulomādivasena vibhajiyamānaṃ aparimāṇanayaṃ evāti āha ‘‘anantanayamahāpaṭṭhānapaṭimaṇḍita’’nti. Satthukiccaṃ sādhessatīti khandhādivibhāgena ñāyamānaṃ catusaccasambodhāvahattā satthārā sammāsambuddhena kātabbakiccaṃ nipphādessati.
「他们将教诫」、「他们将教导」(ovadissanti anusāsissanti),这是从成就教诫与教导职责的角度而说的。显示巴利原文
Ovadissanti anusāsissanti ovādānusāsanīkiccanipphādanato.
“行”(cārittaṃ)指惯行,即对新学比丘说亲切的话语,对长老说尊敬的话语,这就是它的含义。因此他说“尊者”(bhante)或“具寿”(āyasmā)。因为“尊者”或“具寿”这些就是恭敬语,而在世间,“尊驾”、“天爱”也是恭敬语。显示巴利原文
Cārittanti samudācārā, navesu piyālāpaṃ vuḍḍhesu gāravālāpanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘bhanteti vā āyasmāti vā’’ti. Gāravavacanaṃ hetaṃ yadidaṃ bhanteti vā āyasmāti vā, loke pana ‘‘tatra bhava’’nti, ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti ca gāravavacanameva.
当说到「若愿意,可以废除」时,也意味着「若不愿意,就不应废除」,因此他说「以选择性措辞而保留」。「力」指智慧之力。如果「不废除」是他们所见且所愿的,那世尊为什么还说「若愿意,可以废除」呢?这是随顺那种人的内心意乐。因为有些人不愿受持微小学处,如果不这样对他们说,他们会对世尊生起不满,那将导致他们长夜不利与痛苦。但这样说了之后,他们就不会不满,反而会想:「这是我们自己的过失,因为在我们当中有人不希望废除。」另有人说:「这是为了让整个教法由僧伽来掌管,才这样说的。」无论世尊制定了什么学处,释迦子沙门们都以头顶戴而受持,如护己命般守护。因此,即使告知「若僧团愿意,可以废除那些微小学处」,他们也不废除,反而一如既往,即使偶有违犯也依然守护。这也可以看作是为了彰显世尊教法与僧伽的殊胜而这样说。因此,阿难尊者和其他比丘都没有问:「尊者,哪些是微小?哪些是更微小?」因为他们根本没有废除的想法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatū’’ti vutte ‘‘na ākaṅkhamāno na samūhanatū’’tipi vuttameva hotīti āha ‘‘vikappavacaneneva ṭhapesī’’ti. Balanti ñāṇabalaṃ. Yadi asamūhananaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, tadeva ca icchitaṃ, atha kasmā bhagavā ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatū’’ti avocāti? Tathārūpapuggalajjhāsayavasena. Santi hi keci khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samādāya saṃvattituṃ anicchantā, tesaṃ tathā avuccamāne bhagavati vighāto uppajjeyya, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya, tathā pana vutte tesaṃ vighāto na uppajjeyya ‘‘amhākaṃ evāyaṃ doso, yato amhesu eva keci samūhananaṃ na icchantī’’ti. Keci ‘‘sakalassa pana sāsanassa saṅghāyattabhāvakaraṇatthaṃ tathā vutta’’nti vadanti. Yañca kiñci satthārā sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ samaṇā sakyaputtiyā sirasā sampaṭicchitvā jīvitaṃ viya rakkhanti. Tathā hi te ‘‘khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho samūhanatū’’ti vuttepi na samūhaniṃsu, aññadatthu ‘‘purato viya tassa accayepi rakkhiṃsu evā’’ti satthusāsanassa , saṅghassa ca mahantabhāvadassanatthampi tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi āyasmā ānando, aññepi vā bhikkhū ‘‘katamaṃ pana bhante khuddakaṃ, katamaṃ anukhuddaka’’nti na pucchiṃsu samūhanajjhāsayasseva abhāvato.
「不应那样取」是说,对于「那先长老知道哪些是微小学处」之类的说法,由于不明了其真实意趣,不能那样去理解。现在为阐明此意趣,而说:「那先长老……」。因为那先长老(详《弥兰陀问经·不分裂品》)为了折伏他人的论诤,在结集时,从结集法藏的大长老们所选取的文句中,仅取了最后一部分,为弥兰陀王开示。而大迦叶长老由于不愿意废除任何一个学处,才那样诵出甘马语。因此,他们的那种说法不应那样去理解。显示巴利原文
Na taṃ evaṃ gahetabbanti ‘‘nāgasenatthero khuddānukhuddakaṃ jānātī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ taṃ nesaṃ vacanaṃ iminā vuttākārena na gahetabbaṃ adhippāyassa aviditattā. Idāni taṃ adhippāyaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘nāgasenattherohī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā nāgasenatthero (milindapañhe abhejjavagge vitthāro) paresaṃ vādapathopacchedanatthaṃ saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakamahātherehi gahitakoṭṭhāsesu ca antimakoṭṭhāsameva gahetvā milindarājānaṃ paññāpesi. Mahākassapatthero pana ekasikkhāpadampi asamūhanitukāmatāya tathā kammavācaṃ sāveti, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ vacanaṃ tathā na gahetabbaṃ.
217 「两疑」谓两种执取,即不肯定的执取。「疑惑」指因怀疑而生起的过失。故说「不能决断」。「我告诉你们那」是指,就那位怀有疑惑的比丘,我对你们这样宣说。显示巴利原文
217.Dveḷhakanti dvidhāgāho, anekaṃsaggāhoti attho. Vimatīti saṃsayāpatti. Tenāha ‘‘vinicchituṃ asamatthatā’’ti. Taṃ vo vadāmīti taṃ saṃsayavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya vo tumhe vadāmi.
「即现前作证无疑之智」是指:对于佛陀等,那些比丘的无疑状态并非由他们自己现前造作而成,因此是以一切知智证悟此义而安住。即就此义而言。显示巴利原文
Nikkaṅkhabhāvapaccakkhakaraṇañāṇaṃ yevāti buddhādīsu tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ nikkaṅkhabhāvassa paccakkhakāriyābhāvato tamatthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇameva. Ettha etasmiṃ atthe.
218 「不放逸」即不疏忽,其含义是与智慧相应的念。由于此处念的作用特别殊胜,因此说「以念不分离」。世尊将这一切教诫都摄入“不放逸”这一句而授予,这既是从意义上说,也因为它总摄了全部佛语。显示巴利原文
218. Appamajjanaṃ appamādo, so pana atthato ñāṇūpasañhitā sati. Yasmā tattha satiyā byāpāro sātisayo, tasmā ‘‘satiavippavāsenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Appamādapadeyeva pakkhipitvā adāsi taṃ atthato, tassa sakalassa buddhavacanassa saṅgaṇhanato ca.
般涅槃论释显示巴利原文
Parinibbutakathāvaṇṇanā
219 「般涅槃准备」是指,在禅那等与心方面达到了最上自在的状态,而作时间限定:「在这段时间内,我将进入如此数量的定,然后般涅槃」,如是限定时间后而入定。这里所说的长老,即阿那律长老。显示巴利原文
219. Jhānādīsu, citte ca paramukkaṃsagatavasībhāvatāya ‘‘ettake kāle ettakā samāpattiyo samāpajjitvā parinibbāyissāmī’’ti kālaparicchedaṃ katvā samāpatti samāpajjanaṃ ‘‘parinibbānaparikamma’’nti adhippetaṃ. Theroti anuruddhatthero.
而且,前面所说关于六十五种禅那的入定情况,也只是略说而已。为什么呢?因为世尊那时也是每天都毫无遗漏地进入一切日常所用的等至,为显示此点,才说“进入涅槃城”等语。显示巴利原文
Ayampicāti yathāvuttapañcasaṭṭhiyā jhānānaṃ samāpannabhāvakathāpi saṅkhepakathā eva, kasmā ? Yasmā bhagavā tadāpi devasikaṃ vaḷañjanasamāpattiyo sabbāpi aparihāpetvā samāpajji evāti dassento ‘‘nibbānapuraṃ pavisanto’’tiādimāha.
这两者也是无间的;对于省察而言,由于它们大多具有无间性,故也属于禅那的范畴。因为“有分心”是最后之心,由此“有”而命终,故称之为“死”。因此,并非唯有世尊如此,一切众生都是以“有分心”而命终的。为了显示此义,故说“凡是……”等语。显示巴利原文
Imāni dvepi samanantarāneva paccavekkhaṇāyapi yebhuyyenānantariyakatāya jhānapakkhikabhāvato, yasmā bhavaṅgacittaṃ sabbapacchimaṃ, tato bhavato cavanato ‘‘cutī’’ti vuccati, tasmā na kevalaṃ ayameva bhagavā, atha kho sabbepi sattā bhavaṅgacitteneva cavantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye hi kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
220 “无类似补特伽罗”:因为在戒等功德上,无人能与他相比,所以没有与他相似之人。显示巴利原文
220.Paṭibhāgapuggalavirahitoti sīlādiguṇehi asadisatāya sadisapuggalarahito.
221 诸行于此寂止,故称“寂止”。涅槃即是如此被称呼、被认知、被言说的。显示巴利原文
221. Saṅkhārā vūpasamanti etthāti vūpasamoti evaṃsaṅkhātaṃ ñātaṃ kathitaṃ nibbānaṃ.
222 “Yanti”一词是用于人的对格,因此说“谁作了时间”(意为:谁死去了)。显示巴利原文
222.Yanti paccatte upayogavacananti āha ‘‘yo kālaṃ akarī’’ti.
“以善开敷之心”:由于与喜和悦相应,所以是以极善开敷、喜悦的心。他忍受了感受;由于已被彻底遍知,故不再有“无有”之集的产生。因为完全寂灭的状态,所以是无障碍解脱。显示巴利原文
Suvikasitenevāti pītisomanassayogato suṭṭhu vikasitena muditena. Vedanaṃ adhivāsesi abhāvasamudayo kato suṭṭhu pariññātattā. Anāvaraṇavimokkho sabbaso nibbutabhāvato.
223 「ākārā(诸行相)」:它们令自己的果呈现相同形态,故称为行相,即诸因。「sabbākāravarūpeteti」的意思是:具足一切胜行相,也就是以戒等功德这些最殊胜的因而具足。显示巴利原文
223. Ākaronti attano phalāni samānākāre karontīti ākārā, kāraṇāni. Sabbākāravarūpeteti sabbehi ākāravarehi uttamakāraṇehi sīlādiguṇehi samannāgateti attho.
225 「Kathaṃbhūtā」:是怎样的存在,即成为怎样的人。显示巴利原文
225.Kathaṃbhūtāti kīdisābhūtā.
「小长时间」:指短暂的时间,约两三个纳利卡。显示巴利原文
Cullakaddhānanti parittaṃ kālaṃ dvattināḍikāmattaṃ velaṃ.
佛陀舍利供养注显示巴利原文
Buddhasarīrapūjāvaṇṇanā
227 铜钹等打击乐器归属此类,故称为“打击乐器类”,即蒙皮等乐器。因此说“一切乐器”。显示巴利原文
227. Kaṃsatāḷādi tāḷaṃ avacarati etthāti ‘‘tāḷāvacara’’nti vuccati ātatāditūriyabhaṇḍaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍa’’nti.
“唯取南方部分”:即不从其他方向取,只从双娑罗树所在处的南方部分取;再从那里取出南方部分并带走。显示巴利原文
Dakkhiṇadisābhāgenevāti aññena disābhāgena anāharitvā yamakasālānaṃ ṭhānato dakkhiṇadisābhāgeneva, tatopi dakkhiṇadisābhāgaṃ haritvā netvā.
“类似祇园”:指在舍卫城中类似祇园的处所;也有读作“在类似祇园之处”的异本。显示巴利原文
Jetavanasadiseti sāvatthiyā jetavanasadise ṭhāne, ‘‘jetavanasadise ṭhāne’’tipi pāṭho.
228 庄严吉祥堂:灌顶时用作庄严的吉祥堂。显示巴利原文
228.Pasādhanamaṅgalasālāyāti abhisekakāle alaṅkaraṇamaṅgalasālāya.
229 “提婆达尼耶”是那个贼的名字。显示巴利原文
229.Devadāniyoti tassa corassa nāmaṃ.
大迦叶长老事注释显示巴利原文
Mahākassapattheravatthuvaṇṇanā
231 “从波婆城”:从波婆城。因为了知依赖于作意,而他当时未作意,所以不知世尊已般涅槃。长老心想:“我将去见十力”,或者于世尊的遗体中生起世尊想,而作此思惟。因此他说:“于是将世尊搁置一旁。”他以推理智思惟:“他必定已般涅槃。”显示巴利原文
231.Pāvāyāti pāvā nagarato. Āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā jānanassa anāvajjitattā satthu parinibbānaṃ ajānanto ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti thero cintesi, satthu sarīre vā satthusaññaṃ uppādento tathā cintesi. Tenevāha ‘‘atha bhagavantaṃ ukkhipitvā’’ti. ‘‘Dhuvaṃ parinibbuto bhavissatī’’ti cintesi pārisesañāyena. Jānantopi thero ājīvakaṃ pucchiyeva, pucchane pana kāraṇaṃ sayameva pakāsetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
「今日已般涅槃七日」,意为从今日逆数,于第七日般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Ajja sattāhaparinibbutoti ajja divasato paṭilomato sattame ahani parinibbuto.
232 「以管与袋」,指既使用管,也使用袋。显示巴利原文
232.Nāḷiyā vāpakenāti nāḷiyā ceva thavikāya ca.
「悦耳的」,指言语动听、音声甜美。「具辩才」,指具足辩才。「先食后饮之粥」,是说先咀嚼此粥,随后饮下。显示巴利原文
Mañjuketi mañjubhāṇine madhurassare. Paṭibhāneyyaketi paṭibhānavante. Bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgūti paṭhamaṃ bhuñjitvā pivitabbayāgu.
「他的」指须跋陀罗,也就是那位老年出家人。显示巴利原文
Tassāti subhaddassa vuḍḍhapabbajitassa.
“Ārādhitasāsana”(已奉行教法)意为令教法妥善安立。“Alan”(能)指有能力。“Pāpa”(恶)指恶人。“Osakkāpetun”(令退减)意为使之减损、消失。显示巴利原文
Ārādhitasāsaneti samāhitasāsane. Alanti samattho. Pāpoti pāpapuggalo. Osakkāpetunti hāpetuṃ antaradhāpetuṃ.
“Pañhavāra”(问分)指如同提问一般的解答,例如“在何时,欲界善心生起?”等等,又如“在何时,为投生色界而修习道?”等等,这些内容依一种或两种界差别而展开。“Mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāmā”(如果树根失去,我们将像毗舍遮一样)意思是:如同依树而住的毗舍遮,树枝毁坏时,便依止树干而住;树干毁坏时,便依止树根而住;若树根也消失,它便无所依止。我们也会如此。还有一种解释:说“树根若失”,据说毗舍遮会砍下某棵树的根段送给自己的孩子,只要那根段未从孩子手中失落,他就能隐形游荡于彼处;如果那根段因未截断或忘失而丢失,他便会显出身形,乃至人类也能看见。正是针对这种情况,才说“如果树根失去,我们将像毗舍遮一样”。显示巴利原文
Pañhavārāti pañhā viya vissajjanāni ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā, (dha. sa. 1.1) ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1.251) ca pavattāni ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni.Mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāmāti yathā rukkhe adhivattho pisāco tassa sākhāparivāre naṭṭhe khandhaṃ nissāya vasati, khandhe naṭṭhe mūlaṃ nissāya vasati, mūle pana naṭṭhe anissayova hoti, tathā bhavissāmāti attho. Atha vā mūle naṭṭheti pisācena kira rukkhagacchādīnaṃ kañcideva mūlaṃ chinditvā attano puttassa dinnaṃ, yāva taṃ tassa hatthato na vigacchati, tāva so taṃ padesaṃ adissamānarūpo vicarati. Yadā pana tasmiṃ kenaci acchinnabhāvena vā sativippavāsavasena vā naṭṭhe manussānampi dissamānarūpo vicarati, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāmā’’ti.
“Maṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā”(以我为身证者)意思是:他通过身体亲证了那条行道,因此使我成为该教法的见证者。“Paṭicchāpesi”(令其接受),这一责令接受之事,应以《迦叶经》来阐明。显示巴利原文
Maṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvāti taṃ paṭipadaṃ kāyena sacchikatavantaṃ tasmā tassā desanāya sakkhibhūtaṃ maṃ katvā. Paṭicchāpesi taṃ paṭicchāpanaṃ kassapasuttena dīpetabbaṃ.
233 因携有大量的栴檀木块,便堆成了栴檀火葬柴堆。显示巴利原文
233. Candanaghaṭikābāhullato candanacitakā.
“Taṃ sutvā”(听了那番话),指听了具寿阿那律长老所道出的诸位天神的意图。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sutvāti taṃ āyasmatā anuruddhattherena vuttaṃ devatānaṃ adhippāyaṃ sutvā.
234 「Dasikatantaṃ vā」意指被包裹着的未缝制迦尸衣的衣边,连一丝线也没有。「Dārukkhandhaṃ vā」则指栴檀等火葬用的木柴堆。显示巴利原文
234.Dasikatantaṃ vāti paliveṭhitaahatakāsikavatthānaṃ dasaṭhānena tantumattampi vā. Dārukkhandhaṃ vāti candanādicitakadārukkhandhaṃ vā.
235 由于整体上的惯用名称亦可指称其部分,因此作为身体组成部分的骨头,便被称作「sarīrāni」(诸身)。显示巴利原文
235. Samudāyesu pavattavohārānaṃ avayavesu dissanato sarīrassa avayavabhūtāni aṭṭhīni ‘‘sarīrānī’’ti vuttāni.
「Na vippakiriṃsu」(没有散开)意思是:它们保持原本的形态。而在说了“其余散开了”之后,为了说明它们是如何散开的,才接着说「tattha」(在那里)等语。显示巴利原文
Na vippakiriṃsūti sarūpeneva ṭhitāti attho. ‘‘Sesā vippakiriṃsū’’ti vatvā yathā pana tā vippakiṇṇā ahesuṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
水流出而令其熄灭,这是仗着天神威力。为何有这么多股大水流呢?因此说:“世尊的火葬堆很大。”那火葬堆确实广大,宽有二十丈。“八齿犁”是指犁具,这些犁恰好有八块宛如牙齿的木板,因此称为“八齿犁”。显示巴利原文
Udakadhārā nikkhamitvā nibbāpesunti devatānubhāvena. Evaṃ mahatiyo bahū udakadhārā kimatthāyāti āha ‘‘bhagavato citako mahanto’’ti. Mahā hi so vīsaratanasatiko. Aṭṭhadantakehīti naṅgalehi aṭṭheva hi nesaṃ dantasadisāni potthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘aṭṭhadantakānī’’ti vuccati.
所谓“以法谈为量”:因为此事极为稀有、前所未有,令见者与闻者生起殊胜的净信,且特别彰显佛陀的威力。对于已般涅槃的佛陀世尊,确实有这样的事迹。当说法者们讲述这一事迹时,随顺自己智力所展开的法谈,便是此处的量;由于应当阐述的意义极为深广,所以说这属于注释的领域。“令作四种香粉涂地”:即把零陵香、藏红花、亚瓦那花和塔玛拉叶磨成的香粉,令人涂布地面。“悬挂”:即于各处垂挂来作装饰。手持香物所结的花环称为香鬘,宝珠串成的则称宝鬘。“令作外竹篱与内布幔”:以此作成布幔竹篱的围栏。能捕风的幢幡称为风幡。以獐子形为床脚的床座是獐子床座,在那獐子床座上敷设。显示巴利原文
Dhammakathāvapamāṇanti ativiya acchariyabbhutabhāvato passantānaṃ, suṇantānañca sātisayaṃ pasādāvahabhāvato, savisesaṃ buddhānubhāvadīpanato. Parinibbutassa hi buddhassa bhagavato evarūpo ānubhāvoti taṃ pavattiṃ kathentānaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ attano ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ pavattiyamānā dhammakathā evettha pamāṇaṃ vaṇṇetabbassa atthassa mahāvisayattā, tasmā vaṇṇanābhūmi nāmesāti adhippāyo. Catujjātiyagandhaparibhaṇḍaṃ kāretvāti tagarakuṅkumayavanapupphatamālapattāni pisitvā katagandhena paribhaṇḍaṃ kāretvā. Khacitvāti tattha tattha olambanavasena racetvā, gandhavatthūni gahetvā ganthitamālā gandhadāmāni ratanāvaḷiyo ratanadāmāni. Bahikilañjaparikkhepassa, antosāṇiparikkhepassa karaṇena sāṇikilañjaparikkhepaṃ kāretvā. Vātaggāhiniyo paṭākā vātapaṭākā. Sarabharūpapādako pallaṅko sarabhamayapallaṅko, tasmiṃ sarabhamayapallaṅke.
“手持矛的人”:因矛与这些人相伴,如同说“矛在舞动”一般,所以指手持矛者施行的全面守护,即五重防护。因此他说:“令手持矛者围守”。对于“以弓”也是同样的道理。如同制成铠甲网一般,以密不可分的守护铠甲,编成网甲状。显示巴利原文
Sattihatthā purisā sattiyo taṃsahacaraṇato yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti, tehi samantato rakkhāpanaṃ pañcakaraṇanti āha ‘‘sattihatthehi purisehi parikkhipāpetvā’’ti. Dhanūhīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sannāhagavacchikaṃviya katvā nirantarāvaṭṭhitaārakkhasannāhena gavacchijālaṃ viya katvā.
「善妙之戏」(Sādhukīḷita):由于能成就自他利益,故称为“善”(sādhu);他们的嬉戏(kīḷita)能生出广大福德,是与来世之义不相违背的游戏而住,这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Sādhukīḷitanti saparahitaṃ sādhanaṭṭhena sādhū, tesaṃ kīḷitaṃ uḷārapuññapasavanato, samparāyikatthāvirodhikaṃ kīḷāvihāranti attho.
「舍利分配之注释」(Sarīradhātuvibhajanavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
Sarīradhātuvibhajanavaṇṇanā
236 「依此方式」(Imināva niyāmena):即如坐在大殿中那样,未作任何回避,纯粹只依这一方式。「梦见」(Supinaka):即恶梦。「穿上双层细布下衣」(Dukūladupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā):将两块细布衣料叠合在一起穿上。因为若如此穿着,即使悲恸至极,衣物也不会滑落而能保持原状。显示巴利原文
236.Imināva niyāmenāti yena nīhārena mahātale nisinno kañci parihāraṃ akatvā kevalaṃ iminā niyāmeneva. Supinakoti dussupinako. Dukūladupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvāti dve dukūlavatthāni ekajjhaṃ katvā nivāsetvā. Evañhi tāni sokasamappitassāpi abhassitvā tiṭṭhanti.
「灌顶洒水者」(Abhisekasiñcaka):指国王灌顶即位时,负责洒水以成办灌顶吉祥之人,因为这是最上等的吉祥。「他昏了过去」(Visaññī jāto):正是如此——因深谙世尊殊胜功德,其爱敬得以恒常安住;依凡夫之信而建立的净信牢固;又因曾蒙受恩惠,内心变得柔软。显示巴利原文
Abhisekasiñcakoti rajjābhiseke abhisekamaṅgalasiñcako uttamamaṅgalabhāvato. Visaññī jāto yathā taṃ bhagavato guṇavisesāmatarasaññutāya avaṭṭhitapemo pothujjanikasaddhāya patiṭṭhitapasādo katūpakāratāya sañjanitacittamaddavo.
「如金像般的颜色」(Suvaṇṇabimbisakavaṇṇanti):就像精心制成的靠垫(apassena)那样的颜色。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇabimbisakavaṇṇanti suviracita apassenasadisaṃ.
为何在此处,巴利圣典把巴瓦人(pāveyyakā)列在最后?难道他们尽管离拘尸那罗更近,却在最后才出发吗?是的,为了表明他们是在最后出发的,所以才说“在那里,巴瓦人……”等语。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha pāveyyakā pāḷiyaṃ sabbapacchato gahitā, kiṃ te kusinārāya āsannatarāpi sabbapacchato uṭṭhitā? Āma, sabbapacchato uṭṭhitāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha pāveyyakā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「为供奉舍利」(Dhātupāsanattha):意即为了供奉导师的舍利。他们持这样的立场,说:“依正理,这些舍利当归我们所有。”显示巴利原文
Dhātupāsanatthanti satthu dhātūnaṃ payirupāsanāya. Nesaṃ pakkhā ahesuṃ ‘‘ñāyena tesaṃ santakā dhātuyo’’ti.
237 这称为“度那之狮吼”,宣说了与世尊三时相关的内容。正是为此,世尊在行路时决意:“从后面来的度那婆罗门,只要他还在看我的足迹,便让这足迹不消失。”随后,世尊坐在一棵树下。度那婆罗门也心想:“这些是含括天界的整个世间中最上等者的足迹”,于是循着足迹来到导师面前。导师为他说法,他对世尊生起了坚固的信心,随即说出此语。他说了什么呢?就是:“请听……”等等。显示巴利原文
237.Doṇagajjitaṃ nāma avoca satthu avatthattayūpasaṃhitaṃ. Etadatthameva hi bhagavā maggaṃ gacchanto ‘‘pacchato āgacchanto doṇo brāhmaṇo yāva me padavaḷañjaṃ passati, tāva mā vigacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāya aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi. Doṇopi kho brāhmaṇo ‘‘imāni sadevake loke aggapuggalassa padānī’’ti sallakkhento padānusārena satthu santikaṃ upagacchi, satthāpissa dhammaṃ desesi, tenapi so bhagavati niviṭṭhasaddho ahosi. Etadavoca, kiṃ avocāti āha ‘‘suṇantu…pe… avocā’’ti.
以身体同一集会,以语言同一言说,没有异语,如此便得和合。解释其原因时,他说“相互喜悦”。因此,他教导说:“应当以心也相互喜悦而住。”显示巴利原文
Kāyena ekasannipātā vācāya ekavacanā abhinnavacanā evaṃ samaggā hotha. Tassa panidaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘sammodamānā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘cittenāpi aññamaññaṃ sammodamānā hothā’’ti.
238 “从各处集合的僧团”:即从各自的住处前来,汇集一处,以聚集的状态而成为集合的僧团。同样地,以聚为群体的状态而成为集合的大众。通过接受言语而应允。显示巴利原文
238.Tato tato samāgatasaṅghānanti tato tato attano vasanaṭṭhānato samāgantvā sannipatitabhāvena samāgatasaṅghānaṃ. Tathā samāpatitasamūhabhāvena samāgatagaṇānaṃ. Vacanasampaṭicchanena paṭissuṇitvā.
界塔供养注疏(Dhātuthūpapūjāvaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
Dhātuthūpapūjāvaṇṇanā
239 “夜叉执”(yakkhaggāho)即天神附体(devatāveso)。“抛掷病”(khipitakaṃ)是指由界扰动(dhātukkhobhaṃ uppādetvā)所引发的抛掷病(khipitakarogo)。“不喜食病”(arocako)即对食物不悦的病(āhārassa aruccanarogo)。显示巴利原文
239.Yakkhaggāho devatāveso. Khipitakaṃ dhātukkhobhaṃ uppādetvā khipitakarogo. Arocako āhārassa aruccanarogo.
“第七日”(sattamadivase):即七岁七个月之后的第七天。“以力相称”(balānurūpena):即以财富之力相称。显示巴利原文
Sattamadivaseti sattavassasattamāsato parato sattame divase. Balānurūpenāti vibhavabalānurūpena.
“后来的结集者”(pacchā saṅgītikārakā):指参与第二次、第三次结集的人。“看见舍利的障碍之后”(dhātūnaṃ antarāyaṃ disvāti):意为看到安放在各处塔庙中的舍利,虽依原样安住,却将因邪见者而遭遇障碍;同时也预见,通过大舍利埋藏使之得到妥善保护之后,未来无忧法王将取出这些舍利并广布流传,能令包含天神在内的世间获得利益与安乐。“仅仅是照料”(paricaraṇamattamevāti):即取走之后,只留存那些可被照料的舍利,把它们交到国王们手中,而非安置于塔庙。正因如此,后来无忧法王在塔庙中无法再获得舍利。显示巴利原文
Pacchā saṅgītikārakāti dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ saṅgītikārakā. Dhātūnaṃ antarāyaṃ disvāti tattha tattha cetiye yathāpatiṭṭhāpitabhāveneva ṭhitānaṃ dhātūnaṃ micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vasena antarāyaṃ disvā, mahādhātunidhānena sammadeva rakkhitānaṃ anāgate asokena dhammaraññā tato uddharitvā vitthāritabhāve kate sadevakassa lokassa hitasukhāvahabhāvañca disvāti adhippāyo. Paricaraṇamattamevāti gahetvā paricaritabbadhātumattameva. Rājūnaṃ hatthe ṭhapetvā, na cetiyesu. Tathā hi pacchā asokamahārājā cetiyesu dhātūnaṃ na labhati.
为使前一批得以容纳,又制作后一批,他让人各造了八个栴檀等材质的匣子与塔。在红栴檀等材质上,也是如此。「宝匣中」:除了由红宝石、肉色宝珠、宝石、水晶所制成者外,安置在其余种种宝饰之匣中。显示巴利原文
Purimaṃ purimaṃ katassa gaṇhanayogyaṃ pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ kārento aṭṭha aṭṭha haricandanādimaye karaṇḍe ca thūpe ca kāresi. Lohitacandanamayādīsupi eseva nayo. Maṇikaraṇḍesūti lohitaṅkamasāragallaphalikamaye ṭhapetvā avasesamaṇivicittakesu karaṇḍesu.
「塔庙园塔庙的尺寸规模」(thūpārāmacetiyappamāṇaṃ)是指天爱帝须大王(devānaṃpiyatissamahārājena)所建造的塔庙的规模(kāritacetiyappamāṇaṃ)。显示巴利原文
Thūpārāmacetiyappamāṇanti devānaṃpiyatissamahārājena kāritacetiyappamāṇaṃ.
「花鬘不要枯萎」:即作此决意:“直至无忧法王为了在外建造塔庙而从此处取出舍利为止,愿花鬘皆不枯萎。”「牵引绳」:即系于门闩拉环之绳。「钥匙与印封」:为开启门而备的钥匙与印封。显示巴利原文
Mālā mā milāyantūti ‘‘yāva asoko dhammarājā bahi cetiyāni kāretuṃ ito dhātuyo uddharissati, tāva mālā mā milāyantū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā. Āviñchanarajjuyanti aggaḷāviñchanarajjuyaṃ. Kuñcikamuddikanti dvāravivaraṇatthaṃ kuñcikañceva muddikañca.
“猛兽组合机关”:指一个令人怖畏、犹如灰坑的机关。由于各部分相互联动,故被做成组合形象的机关,因此经文说“木制形象等”。“以楔子绑缚后”:指毗首羯磨凭自己的神力,仅用一根楔子,就将由众多木制形象构成的精巧机关固定好,随后回了天界。而“从周围”等语,则是为了显示在那次舍利埋藏中,阿阇世王成就的殊胜功业。显示巴利原文
Vāḷasaṅghātayantanti kukkulaṃ paṭibhayadassanaṃ aññamaññapaṭibaddhagamanāditāya saṅghāṭitarūpakayantaṃ yojesi. Tenāha ‘‘kaṭṭharūpakānī’’tiādi. Āṇiyā bandhitvāti anekakaṭṭharūpavicittayantaṃ attano devānubhāvena ekāya eva āṇiyā bandhitvā vissakammo devalokameva gato. ‘‘Samantato’’tiādi pana tasmiṃ dhātunidāne ajātasattuno kiccavisesānuṭṭhānadassanaṃ.
当国王问“舍利埋藏在何处”时,有一部分人说:“那次集会中,我们并未获得特别的利益。”另一部分人说:“他们隐藏了自身,若依靠那位年长者的言语去探究,便能知晓,因此才不告知。”“夜叉仆”:指那些通过献供等仪轨让天神附体的人,也就是被鬼怪所操控的人。显示巴利原文
‘‘Asukaṭṭhāne nāma dhātunidhāna’’nti raññā pucchite ‘‘tasmiṃ sannipāte visesalābhino nāhesu’’nti keci. ‘‘Attānaṃ nigūhitvā tassa vuḍḍhatarassa vacanaṃ nissāya vīmaṃsanto jānissatīti na kathesu’’nti apare. Yakkhadāsaketi upahārādividhinā devatāvesanake bhūtāviggāhake.
“此句”:指由第二次结集的诸师所安立的“此事过去曾发生”这一句。第三次结集的诸师在阐明《大界藏》的意义后,也将它安立了下来。显示巴利原文
Imaṃpadanti ‘‘evametaṃ bhūtapubba’’nti dutiyasaṅgītikārehi ṭhapitaṃ imaṃ padaṃ. Mahādhātunidhānampi tassa atthaṃ katvā tatiyasaṅgītikārāpi ṭhapayiṃsu.